Home

Cadillac 2009 SRX Automobile User Manual

1. o do uud i e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued Latch Plate to Buckle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 WARNING Continued 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap portion pull up a e A belt that is worn under On ae VN danger bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a injury A belt worn under the arm can cause collision internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder WARNING bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your ab domen Always wear the lap part of your seat belt your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect yo
2. NAV If Equipped D Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped 152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se D Operating Instructions Uconnect phone If Equipped O Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio O Clock Setting Procedure RER REN RAO P beeen wench beeen nen pees ere ll Media Center 130 RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack O Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play o Notes On Playing MP3 Files O Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode ll Media Center 130 RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack And Sirius Radio ek Re Rees O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 198 D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play 204 H Notes On Playing MP3 Files 206 O List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 209 D Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 209 Bl Universal Consumer Interface UCI If Is eibirsosrs P 210 O Connecting The iPod uar asas ARR RR os 2 H Usus IUS Feature seris 29979 9 db Rs 211 O Controlling The iPod Using Radio POHONG 2299 X52 X R8 OUI He heed eee Be 24 ELS MOSES i ieu teg psu ee E oye ed 212 E T3st Or Browse Mode sa csec4acnas eresi 213 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153 ll Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If ll Kicker High
3. 268 Tire Identification Number TIN 266 Tuc MIB 1 29 1 p EORR EGSES CERA T PES 262 Tine Satety IntormadllOH 240646242584 eost taii 262 Nn INDEX 403 TOS EEEE EEEE EE EEEE eee es 73 272 389 Air Pressure ge ee ba eae e pees SN EUN ees 274 General Information 6 3 2257 rd wo He neo meses 272 oi anie e o eabteeton pee RUE MP Re doe ec d 275 Inflation Pressures 52x a dena Rare 9 y 274 ITO ot VCS x cca aux x XE IRA RES XL E 277 Load Capacily wa bea tan eieyes apeu 268 269 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 279 Pressure VOIR DIS HE v a uw tee a ee cod os 160 Qual Grading acus sic ta Oe 24 ta or E 4rd podra 385 len aes oa boeomeac ee ane eee 6 aoe 2 INsiolrTesirirsi Mr 2 le ci PC 2 8 DOIG Ges ERE e PRU dE ded eee ER ER 262 2 TEENE EEEE E E E 264 OPINI 444 ake eon REOR PERUR RR OE ee ee 276 Tread Wear Indicators a soa oe 62 ES RS a be S 276 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 293 Tow Hooks Emergency sess 308 TOWING 253 9 9 230 bun et one RAI ORC dm 289 309 Behind a Motor Home usse oce 6e ERROR 299 Dusdpled Veni pire pasa dykes perar EAT 309 ep d rr 299 Recrealondl tc Saas isg Pets A board ded ACE A 299 n PCTP E 293 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home 299 TIraclon COSE seet ous 6 9 dde rcr eee 2905 IiGcHOR COBUDL LIS BE uuamu mp3 wee ret v rr e 160 Trauer sway Control TSC 3 arsch demon 260 Moler TOWS serg 15 biu ae P Sas oe en 289 Coolng System lps ss
4. 90 sec appears Display Units of Measure In The EVIC odometer and Uconnect gps if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ENGLISH or MET RIC appears System Status Press and release the MENU button until one of the following System Status messages displays in the EVIC e System OK e System Warnings Displayed will display all currently active System Warnings 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Tire Pressure Monitor System shows the current pres sure of all four road tires For additional information refer to Tire Pressure Monitor System in Starting And Operating 3f vom 34 37 3e Tire Pressure Display NOTE e Tires heat up during normal driving conditions Heat will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi 14 to 41 kPa during normal driving conditions Refer to Tires General Information Tire Inflation Pres sures in Starting And Operating for additional information e Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 RER REN RBZ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 The REN RER and RBZ radios contain a CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigab
5. TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or d
6. in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 17 Cruise Indicator cruise Lbs indicator illuminates when the speed con trol system is turned ON 18 Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero 19 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK 20 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position 21 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light A This light informs you of a problem
7. in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Do not place any article under the adjustable pedal s or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving You could lose control and have an accident Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel 81bc4c2c Electronic Speed Control Lever NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated simultaneously If this occurs the Electronic Speed Con trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system OFF push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned OFF when not in use ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 WARNING
8. All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer WARNING Significant over or under inflation of tires can lead to loss of braking effectiveness The Anti Lock Brake System conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph 20 km h If you have your foot lightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may feel slight pedal movement The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow This is normal ee STARTING AND OPERATING 253 The Anti Lock Brake System pump motor runs during the self test at 12 mph 20 km h and during an ABS stop WIRING Continued The pump motor makes a low humming noise during The ABS cannot prevent accidents including operation which is normal those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro WARNING planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish can prevent accidents e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop or the safety of others CAUTION The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics fro
9. Jeep Grand 290 Cherokee SRT8 o m O sj e esI e o e e Ls Le INTRODUCTION 44399388 9 959 80 4C soe eae ea ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING 22 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTENTS B Introduction INTRODUCTION B Rollover Warning leere Mi How To Use This Manual 4 W Warnings And Cautions 4 Vehicle Identification Number 5 Wi Vehicle Modifications Alterations 4 INTRODUCTION See INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publica tions carefully Following the instructions and recom mendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and
10. Leaving the Electronic Speed Control System on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set a Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press down on the lever and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the lever toward you or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition switch erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph 40 km h To Vary the Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME ACCEL lever If the lever is continually held in the RESUME ACCEL position the set speed will continue to increase until the lever is released then the new set speed will be established Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped the vehicle speed increases
11. Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B Mirrors O Automatic Dimming Mirror D Outside Mirrors H Outside Mirrors Folding Feature O Driver s Automatic Dimming Mirrors If Equipped O Power Outside Mirrors o Heated Mirrors If Equipped o Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 80 W Uconnect phone If Equipped 83 80 W Voice Command If Equipped 83 OL Meas oe ois heehee es oe eb eee ees 83 81 O Front Manual Seat Adjustment 04 O Front Seat Adjustment Recline 84 A DO
12. e Doors closed e Hood closed e Liftgate closed e Hazard switch off e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e Ignition key removed from ignition switch e Battery at an acceptable charge level e RKE PANIC button not pressed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 WARNING e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and then shut down 10 seconds later e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switc
13. e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 WARNING Continued e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition and lock your vehicle Do not leave unattended children in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal in juries and death Power Door Locks The power door lock switch is located on each front door panel Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors Power Door Lock Switch If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door If you press the door lock switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition switch and the driver s door is open the doors will not lock 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The rear doors cannot be opened from inside the vehicle until you pull up the lock plungers Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature If Equipped If Auto Unlock is enabled this feature will unlock all the doors when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument
14. increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Run Flat Tires This vehicle is equipped with run flat tires Although the tires are designed with a run flat feature that allows the vehicle to be driven about 50 miles 80 km at 55 mph 88 km h immediate service should be obtained WARNING Do not exceed 50 mph 80 km h if the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light is illuminated Vehicle handling and braking may be reduced You could have an accident and be severely or fatally injured NOTE The run flat feature eliminates the need for a spare tire or jack This vehicle is not equipped with either a spare tire or jack Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 Safety Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire
15. 907 kg GVWR and GAWR limits CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances 298 STARTING AND OPERATINC M WARNING e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range use the AutoStick feature D to select a lower gear range NOTE Using a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reduci
16. ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The Brake Assist System BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent accidents in cluding those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ee STARTING AND OPERATING 257 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can on
17. All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341 FUSES Cartridge Mini us F Description Interior Fuses ne The fuse panel is on the lower instrument panel just to 30 Amp Audio
18. ISMIOM Shean oes Gore d xao Gas RO OUR E pare RS 13 ee ee ee ee ee ee eee ee ee es ee eee 12 13 buon Key Remoyal evacusceateeevacaes at 13 D sinated ENY areae aE e d o ER A 18 uno bihzer Genty Key rasiert dco trentea 15 Infant Restraint a uuu naaa naaa a 60 61 Inflation Pressure Tires llle 274 Information Center Vehicle aa 166 Instrument Cluster esee 155 156 Instrument Panel and Controls 154 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 340 Integrated Power Module Fuses 346 Interior Appearance Cate ese dose 6b 3e ets 339 en INDEX 395 ICO USCS wauphbiee5e5e9 09 99 ages Gs 341 Interior ISMING s 24 95o54 4 e594 44 bs doped 107 Inte HOP DID ua gu saws 4 och eae tenes rap 107 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 110 IrOCUCHON 27 05 cane on Eee var 3 99 3 eee es Inverter Power 4 222990 e 9c RERO REOR 3 140 Jump arung Ladocacaets eeesmd Rice 3 2 304 ey DEPOSEQEDDIE 3o spz doe dob abre do COR Eas 16 key Replacement usce acus DNO den eee aoe ee 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer 54 23 454 Svid ex wa 15 keyin RENINdEr dras iosa ot EOS CE GU RU AC 15 Keyless Entry System uos dca 903 03 PERO CR SCR S pii 19 I PIER e 12 Kicker Sound Systemi 4243454444044 ere as 220 Knee Doler sirs bue Ie eT 2 hee Sa PS E E E 46 Lane Chance ASSiSC as dem eeu das Shane ges 106 Lap Shoulder Dells 2x22 29 ke toe ees 36 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CoNo 24 quem PISO
19. Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 eee STARTING AND OPERATING 263 e Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design spares designed for temporary emergency use only standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded Tires designed to this standard have the letter T into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M 264 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 EXAMPLE 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbo
20. Sube PE si 287 lr 341 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 128 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap a gue ees odes 287 288 314 Gasoline Clean Air eee 283 Gasoline Fuel gence eae ERU RUE eee es eo ee oe 282 Gasoline Reformulated 283 Gauges Coolant Temperature a sd deme xe gd 162 Duel ul ee ae ERE ee 165 POOE serras eperen ena tous pois 156 Tachometer 394 INDEX M sear Ranges epret trge tee T SUR 243 General Information 0 17 23 282 Glass C IONS oa qucd e 9ang kere eee eee a Gas 340 Gross Axle Weight Rating 0 290 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 289 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 83 Hazard Warning Flasher 224 lt 46a 42044 ms 302 Hedd RCS GIONS ou ve yv cr apa aS eg d uev de s 87 Flea NOS seee ate ere en e E E E 87 POO NG ead y te thee po eee eee oa 100 349 Bulb Replacement 244421446584 Ro ROS caw hes 350 On WIV ID ES ud doo a 25 emp oot oe eee 101 ReoliGne usua 193 92292 4 1b E ord d edd d 350 Heated MIBEDES 2 20 9o abor 5 2 9 dS m dos aol dob dos 82 Heated Seats 4 6624 4 xus 2 oe ECL S ROSA 88 90 Pigi Bean INGicaior aeo e bean BS 157 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 106 Hitches Taler TOWING erpatre d iniecto s baa E be d 2 4 292 HOC CHD esteso xs ds d ues e Por ar e d re 143 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 128 Hood Release 22 3 22a xr aur v 98
21. They could be seriously injured in an accident Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system Rear Seat Armrest 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Press the latch and lift the top of the armrest to access the pedals and radio station preset settings Your Remote storage bin Keyless Entry RKE transmitters can also be pro grammed to recall the same positions when the UN LOCK button is pressed Armrest Storage Latch DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED Once programmed the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the Driver Memory Switches driver s door panel can be used to recall the driver s seat driver s outside mirror adjustable brake and accelerator ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters One or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either memory position The memory system can accommodate up to four RKE transmitters each one linked to either of the two memory positions Setting Memory Positions and Linking Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory NOTE Each time the S SET button and a numbered button 1 or 2 are pressed you erase the memory settings for that button and store a new one 1 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position 2 Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if you are setting the memory for driver 1 or button number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2 Th
22. Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires 276 STARTING AND OPERATING Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your dealer for radial tire repairs Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matte
23. Y is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped When YES Y is selected the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears When NO N is selected the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation Service Interval When this feature is selected a service interval between 2 000 miles 3 200 km and 6 000 miles 10 000 km in 500 miles 800 km increments may be selected Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select distances between 2 000 miles 3 200 km and 6 000 miles 10 000 km in 500 miles 800 km increments Reset Service Distance Displays Only if Service Interval was Changed When this feature is selected the current accumulated service distance can be reset to the newly sel
24. and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Light will come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position STARTING AND OPERATING 261 e Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation 262 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings 1 US DOT Safety Stan dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description 054903773 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT
25. but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317 before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the e
26. s ability to cushion Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability shock Objects on the road and chuck holes can Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride 5 Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Overinflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict in loss of vehicle control able steering response Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right 274 STARTING AND OPERATING See Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent mois ture and dirt
27. 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 364 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule _J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil _J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 365 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L Change th
28. 175 e To clear the vehicle s best 0 60 mph 0 100 km h time press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for five seconds Braking Distance When selected this screen displays the vehicle s braking distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was pressed e This feature will only function when applying the brakes at speeds above 30 mph 48 km h e Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature e The word READY will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin The distance and speed measurements display while the event is taking place The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com plete stop The distance and speed measurements will continue to display until the FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the current run and prepare the cluster to record a new run 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 1 8 Mile 1 4 Mile When selected this screen displays the time it takes the vehicle to travel 1 8 mile 1 4 mile within 30 seconds and the vehicle s speed when it reaches 1 8 mile 1 4 mile e The feature will ready when the vehicle is at 0 mph 0 km h The word READY will flash when condi tions are met for the event to begin e Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1 8 mile 1 4 mile in less then 30 seconds e The time and speed will continue to di
29. Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule Replace the engine air cleaner filter L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary filter Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Drain the transfer case and refill Inspect the accessory drive belt s replace if necessary O C O C L L L L M A N T E N A N C E S C H ai D E U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 373 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance 138 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Change the engine oil and engine oil filter filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts
30. Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen w
31. EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated To complete the calibration process drive slowly 5 mph 8 km h in one or more complete circles UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 in an area free from magnetic material until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The Compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows mm 1 Turn on the ignition switch 2 Press the MENU button until Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu is reached 3 Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass is displayed in the EVIC 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will be dis played in the EVIC 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and Geo graphic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings For the most accurate compass per formance the compass variance must be set using the following procedure NO
32. Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary d a M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 371 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Change the engine oil and engine oil filter filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 372 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES See 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or Schedule 126 Months Maintenance
33. Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment 85 ve O Eight Way Driver s Power Seat 85 j o Four Way Passenger s Power Seat If EU DD uc seta d ois ond tea eee 86 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie 0 Head Restraints D Front Heated Seats If Equipped o Rear Heated Seats If Equipped o 60 40 Split Rear Seals iux 2 3 pH PES eps E Driver Memory Seat If Equipped H Setting Memory Positions And Linking Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To WICHIONY Tm o Memory Position Recall Lis DH To Disable a RKE Transmitter Linked To VEDY Dtm Easy ERI EXIEOSdE s uu s da dra PET RS ll To Open And Close The Hood B Lights E Multifunction Lever 4446 52544 RES nan 100 o Headlights And Parking Lights 100 o Automatic Headlights If Equipped 101 o Headlights On Automatically With Wipers 101 oO Smaribeanr If Equipped 2s 53 102 O Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 103 H Automatic Headlight Leveling HID Headin sagt 3 mee s erp tute corra et 103 O Instrument Panel Dimmer 103 O Battery Saver Feature seduced siiret 104 A Ligkts On Reminder 59e d 24428 eraai 104 O Fog Lights If Equipped 105 TUE Signal 606 4 ch ean ban Gat ues A 106 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77 O Lane Change Assist 094 9 eee pe we ES 106 o High Low Beam Switch 9 44 4 ss es 106 AFlash lo Pass us on 4eeuacb eee
34. Panel or Bi Level with A C on If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel and turn on AVC If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control to Bi Level with A C on Adjust Temperature control for comfort Set the Mode control to Defrost Floor or Defrost S Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear Set the Mode control to Floor A If it s sunny you may want more upper air In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level 7 In very cold weather if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control to Defrost Floor or Defrost as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 41352266 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS W Starting Procedures uus emos odie va ed eae 238 O Brake Transmission Interlock Manual O Normal Staru ng 2 34 845 45995 tepid yiii 238 M 2 OEP SS EEK as ak eas ideme Cala Wet O Five Speed Automatic Transmission Below 20 F OF 29 amp 5 0 02 454 50 9rd rd 239 A Gear KINDES o usada agen d dete qr adora EE Exneme Tas TOSE quos eg e ees 299 Rockne The Veqie 445 dace vor en eee es 244 DANC SAE oa tee awed os ea eam ee eos 240 MI S HEOSUGE snecpenrtateedGucodue cys e at 245 W Automatic Transmission 240 MAPEO aos ase rectae ara gp Fea bP bees s 246 O Key Ignition Park Interlock 241 O General Information 247 O Brake Transmission
35. STARTING AND OPERATING 289 TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible WARNING e Do not tow when the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light is illuminated Failure to follow this could result in loss of control and serious injury The tailpipes may be hot and you could be seri ously injured if you come into contact with the tailpipes To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale 290 ST
36. Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition OFF Operation The power sunroof switches remain active for up ap proximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlets that can be used to power cellular phones small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories The power outlets are labeled with either a key or a batter
37. Tel ues opu 9 fee eae hem cena ts 287 W Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 279 o Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 0 287 OPrenuuni System il susea d E TY 279 3 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 288 O General Information 25 99 Es Pa RAE 282 W railler TOWING ues 6s Egone Gee eA irira 289 Mi Fuel Requirements 282 H3 Common Towing Definitions 289 B ONEBS zia ror Er 282 O Trailer Hitch Classification oO Reformulated Gasoline 283 O Trailer Towing Weights oO Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 283 CS ee adi 4 E85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 284 H Trailer And Trailer Tongue Weight 299 MMT In Gasoline LLL 284 O lowing Requirements 22 2 ze xiu ra 295 E Mateunalsosdded lo Fuel 25er ww s 285 INS EP Sea tese ae sient adi HE Fuel System Cauuons 3a dar doe eed diede 285 MO aM Behind Motorhome Etc 0 299 238 STARTING AND OPERATING ee STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows othe
38. The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek ru up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the pr
39. You can signal another vehicle by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Headlight Time Delay This feature delays turning off the headlights for 30 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF To activate the headlight delay the multifunction lever must be rotated to the Off position after the ignition switch is turned to LOCK ACC Only the headlights will illu minate during this time Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Interior Lights The interior lighting consists of courtesy lights below the instrument panel an overhead console light which contains both driver and passenger reading lights read ing lights located above the rear doors and a rear cargo light Opening a door pressing the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or turning the center of the multifunction lever to the extreme up position will activate all interior courtesy lights 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Front Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted in the overhead console Each light can be turned on by pressing the recessed area of the lens To turn these lights off press the recessed area of the lens a second time
40. after approximately 30 min utes ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt CAUTION within two to five minutes WARNING Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the heating element and or degrade the material of the seat e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Heated Seats If Equipped On vehicles equipped with rear heated seats the seats closest to the doors are heated The controls for these seats are located on the rear of the center console Rear Heated Seat Switches After turning the ignition ON you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off a When the High level setting is sele
41. and away seriously or fatally injured from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A with an automatic transmission apply the parking brake child could operate power windows other con before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load trols or move the vehicle on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident Continued 252 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Continued e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces
42. and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual 6 INTRODUCTION BP RJ qo XX WATER iM FUEL DUM M BULA Bai ame em rv 0 a AJ Q7 Twy AEL HEAR Wie MASTER LzHTIM WITH WINDEHIELD ENGINE TR REAM WO ELEETNICALLY PARK LIGHTS D amp FHOST BATTERY HEATED WHOM DerT IRAE PANEL CHARI DEOS S7 GLOW UG POWER STEERMO FLUO ARO WARMER CY TE E AIRBAG a uA MALFUNCTION TRANS GRE CONANT SUPPLEMENTAL IMDUCATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPESATUAS RESTRAINT SYSTEM pl O O 0 FRONT FOG LIGHT Qt BEAR I LAMP s SEAT BELT WM t aes LIFTGATE FELEABE AHD cif TQATE DFEN e qw TORN SIGNALS HEATED SEAT Line z a a REY ACTIVATE OUTLET VERNER ig Hr wing POWER OUTLET a oc O HODD RELEARE LOWER AIH REC CULATION MET F C apd GUAT A
43. applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT en MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329 Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a CAUTION considerable amount of sediment clean and flush witha e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly result in engine damage and may decrease corro dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze sion protection If a non HO
44. as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol 284 STARTING AND OPERATING ee E85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Lig
45. as the FUNCTION SELECT button for two seconds Current measured by the performance pages must never be display will reset along with other functions exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which can jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee The Performance Pages include the following features e 0 60 mph 0 100 km h e Braking Distance e 1 8 Mile e 1 4 Mile e Instantaneous G Force e Peak G Force To access press and release the MENU button until Performance Pages displays in the EVIC Press the SCROLL button to cycle through the features Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to select a feature The following describes each feature and its operation 0 60 mph 0 100 km h When selected this screen displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph 0 to 100 km h within 10 seconds e The feature will ready when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph 0 km h The word READY will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin e Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph 100 km h in less then 10 seconds e The time will continue to display until the FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed e Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the current run time and display the vehicle s best 0 60 mph 0 100 km h time ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
46. driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units If Equipped During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC airbags depending on severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 ms about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SABIC airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEH
47. driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and 256 STARTING AND OPERATING ee stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the ESP Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Program ESP in this section for more information Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system
48. e468 V RT een ae ees 291 Radiator Cap T 331 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 329 355 Cmise Light Cr 164 CU RONO serria RR intrera 143 Customer Assistance sese xe 04490 bo GOs 979 Daytime Running Lights 359 2 9 9 103 en INDEX 391 Dealer Service as ddan 4a 443 400 464604 455 317 Defroster Rear Window 149 Defroster Windshield 73 230 Diagnostic System Onboard 314 Dimmer Switch Headlight 2x bate aem vds 106 Dipsticks Power Steering Disabled Vehicle Towing Disarming Theft System asses Puseq d uesxares 18 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 092 Door LOCKS sses hacen eed BEE eRe ee ES 26 Door Locks Automatic een 28 Door Opener Garage uuu sao A AO eke ees 128 Electric Remote Mirrors 246444 4544 424 Rn 82 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 137 Electronic Brake Control System 299 Anti Lock Brake System eo 99r RR 255 Brake Assist Oyst uu gaewgr eq4 ce MES 256 Electronic Roll Mitigation 257 Electronic Stability Program issues 257 Traction Control System eso RR RR 255 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 257 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 116 Electronic Stability Program ESP i esse 25 257 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 165 Electronic Vehicle Information Center ie S 163 166 Emergency In Case of Freei
49. ees X 323 L mbar DUDDOBE xus d ge REV PS one HOP 85 Maintenance Free Battery xxu oos 9 d 604 9e 545 322 Maintenance Procedures 0 0004 317 Maintenance Schedule 360 Maintenance Schedules 00004 360 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 158 315 Manual Service 2a ucc ue pot Hb bos RR REOR TRES 383 Memory Feature Memory Seat 94 Memoly al A POP m 94 Memory Seats and Radio 445 1a age 94 lud T 283 Mini Trip Computer 2349 44 45 06055408 feos val iir TT 80 A tomiuc DIMMI a rarei edt aden eevee eed as 80 Fleche TOWEN ss saco wowed tones ou ee 82 BICC REMO pereit y Bee toe OS re os 82 Extenor Folding no sevens se eee eee E be 81 lao eae 82 Oude sase eee bane eee oes REOS I EVE 81 brun nee anaoan co een eens teen ae eee eee 83 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Monitor Tire Pressure System 21 2 ec s eke an ae 279 Mopar dacs sas resres inpre 248 099 5 9 43 317 382 IMPO EDD uu 4teeceeg ees ii hite kr ERREI 283 398 INDEX M Multi Function Control Lever 100 New Vehicle Break In Period 70 Occupant Restraints 4 sucus act fe xr drisi 34 51 55 Occupant Restraints Sedan 48 51 54 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 282 Odometer 4 44 44 84 a 66 00464 40650455 163 164 MID D rr 163 EAS DO aces sare x weeds m id Se hart goEre 318 arii A
50. ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position Parking Brake The parking brake lever is located in the center console When the parking brake is applied with the ignition To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate ee STARTING AND OPERATING 251 NOTE WARNING e When the parking brake is applied vehicle speed is detected the light will flash and a chime will sound to e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before the parking brake Always apply the parking attempting to move the vehicle brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front number of reasons A child or others could be wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
51. eo ea bore Gone ee oa oa ye eee 955 Chonge IniebCdl urs asque eons eee RSS 919 lucu P m 318 DispOsal 23s a EX Rud she PN Sq d de S d 321 Ulo M MMC 921 Filler Disposal aues euam sidi beeen ee 321 Materials Added to n on naana 320 Pressure Warne LOIDE 253 one 6 2s a os 160 Recommendation sen 319 355 WISCOSIUY naues ved 9RETPESARGS ATE ETUR 355 Onboard Diagnostic System 314 315 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 128 Operator Manual Owner s Manual D Outside Rearview Mirrors llle 81 Overhead Console 54554 v aede aree ROS p RR 127 Overeanhe TEhelle amp Suo Ss dns bre PS 162 302 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 5 383 Paint Cale MC 336 ait Dama a soda 193 9 iced ous em tena Bees 336 PnC Vinos PTT 22 Park Sense System Rear sis cud ecd tee ss mer s I9 Poth Dike 2444544 ORE ya Vg iriuee RR ES 250 Ic npah MEL 106 Pedals Adjustaple uui d EAR EE eed PRA see 114 Personal OOND S 23 40 3 9 ERR CK nse ea een 179 lc T 70 Pets JIradnspOBHINE ecseri duros dal d er oh ir do 70 Nee INDEX 399 Phone Cellular 2 54 244544 eS IEEE ISTA 83 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 83 Placard Tire and Loading Information 268 Polishing and Waxing 00006 337 Power Distribution Center Fuses 343 Door LOCKS 3 2 0seeue 5 93494 93581 27 lnc 4646264540504 44 645565 nG ina ee 140 DINOS 522 doo 50 baee ee
52. esses 149 EC OIPO DIS BE xs uasa ater x yee acu UR SOS 143 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Mirror This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 Outside Mirrors Outside Mirrors Folding Feature To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirrors All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal l WARNING Driver s Automatic Dimming Mirrors If es Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side Equipped convex mirror will look smaller and farther away The driver and passenger outside mirrors will automati than they really are Relying too much on your cally adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with fe
53. fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition 326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con for lubrication or oil change Replace as required verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure WARNING proper cata
54. function YES Y or NO N SCROLL Button Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip W Functions Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features and System Status Messages 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se COMPASS TEMPERATURE Button D Press and release the COMPASS TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e TURN SIGNAL ON e PERFORM SERVICE e DAMAGED KEY KEY DOES NOT COMMUNI CATE e KEY NOT PROGRAMMED KEY NOT PRO GRAMMED e WRONG KEY KEY DOES NOT BELONG TO VEHICLE e KEY NOT PROGRAMMED EXCEEDED KEY PRO GRAM LIMIT e PROGRAMMING ACTIVE NEW KEY PRO GRAMMED e SERVICE SECURITY KEY e DRIVER PASSENGER DOOR OPEN with graphic e LEFT RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN with graphic e X DOORS OPEN with graphic e LIFTGATE OPEN with graphic e LIFTGATE DOOR OPEN with graphic e LIFTGATE DOORS OPEN with graphic e LIFTGLASS OPEN with graphic e HOOD OPEN with graphic e HOOD DOOR OPEN with graphic ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 e HOOD DOORS OPEN with graphic e AUTO HIGH BEAMS ON e LIFTGATE HOOD OPEN with graphic e AUTO HIGH BEAMS OFF e HOOD GLASS DOOR OPEN with graphic e PARK ASSIST DISABLED e HOOD GLASS DOORS OPEN with graphic e SERVICE SUSPENSION e HOOD GATE D
55. may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses TT KR55120123 2671 5120123 United States Canada FUEL REQUIREMENTS 6 1L Engine The 6 1L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excel lent fuel economy and performance when using high quality premium unleaded 800dfab8 gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or higher RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING Rey METHOD 9 Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mendis the use of gasoline that meets the WWEC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to
56. nnn OWind Buffeting 0 02 00 eee e ee eee 32 O Using The Panic Alarm 2 Enn MT 32 O Programming Additional Transmitters 22 D Liftgate Flipper Glass 0 00 000 35 D Transmitter Battery Replacement 22 lBl Occupant Restraints 0 2 0 ccc eee ee 34 O General Information les 23 3 Lap Shoulder Belts o n ononon 26 lll Remote Starting System If Equipped 24 O Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 37 oO How Io Use Remote Start ese vsmemcth scs 24 3 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 41 la Door Locks eene 26 D Energy Management Feature A O Manual Door Locks 004 26 D Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode O Power Door Locks Pn DM NM 27 EJ PQUIP DEG vanee sone d ooo oe eae Ee 42 O Child Protection Door Lock 28 O Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped 43 MN VVINGOOWS 6245026448 pea ee toes BERS we S 29 O Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System DENIC uos sung ame PETERS EA CES 43 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 O Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 44 W Engine Break In Recommendations 70 ubcdt Bell EXCSHOSEa d 8 i poe 6 burn ee pea e BA 44 W Safety Tips set cova 9 Ton doy dos 3 8 eee tye 71 O Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS O Transporting Passengers 71 2 m DE a O Exhanst Gas 4 pag ye oS Ye PU PERI 2 H Advanced Front Air
57. not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items After a collision deploys the airbags and or pretensioners a deployed airbag and or pretensioner must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the BeltAlert will con tinue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position Chrysler Group LLC does not recom mend deactivating BeltAlert 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF positio
58. not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler Group LLC such investigations may be re quested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insur ance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler Group LLC regardless of initiative the com pany or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction ie pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the U S govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not b
59. number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER RBZ Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE
60. of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two di Q Q its L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 es STARTING AND OPERATING 267 Tire Terminology and Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door of a four door vehicle running from the sill to the roof Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or KPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s reco
61. of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at Or 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 385 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire
62. oil and engine oil Change the engine oil and engine oil filter filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the Replace the engine air cleaner filter following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect and replace PCV valve if Inspect the engine air cleaner filter necessary T replace if necessary Drain the transfer case and refill Inspect the brake linings replace if Adjust parking brake on vehicles necessary equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 3 0 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES xe 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or schedule 102 Months Maintenance Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Change the engine oil and engine oil engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary I Replace the spark plugs Inspect the CV joints _J Flush and replace the engine coolant if Inspect exhaust system not done at 60 months
63. plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in Rear Power Outlet use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if lugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will plugs 8 eh y WARNING discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life 034607158 To avoid serious injury or death and or prevent the engine from starting e Only devices designed for use in this type of Continued outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Continued 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED There is a 115 Volt 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the back of the center console to convert DC current to AC current This outlet can power cellular phones electron ics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Play station3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will most power tools ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 The power inverter is desi
64. position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park ing lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last Battery Saver Feature detent to turn on the interior lighting If the multifunction lever is left in the interior light position parking light position or the headlight position when the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position the battery saver feature will automatically turn off the exterior and interior lights after eight minutes Normal operation will resume when the ignition is turned ON or when the headlight switch is turned to another position Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition switch has been turned to LOCK ACC a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened 031407549 Dimmer Control ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Fog Lights If Equipped 450 The fog light switch is located in the multifunction lever To activate the fog lights turn on the park turn lights low beam headlights or the Automatic Headlights
65. pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR 34 34 81971362 TIRE 35 PSI If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message will not be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios STARTING AND OPERATING 281 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM Sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors In addition the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 282 STARTING AND OPERATING General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device
66. s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 386 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 388 INDEX M ABS Anti Lock Brake System Adding Engine Coola
67. signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled about 1 mile 1 6 km with the turn signals on a chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 4 High Beam Indicator Indicates that headlights are on high beam 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could 5 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of C v an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher tempera
68. so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 5 km h 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push down and hold the SET DECEL lever If the lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position the set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is released Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is tapped vehicle speed decreases To Accelerate for Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control System maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery ee UNDERSTANDIN
69. the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and erit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function 324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road
70. the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable
71. the first detent and hold it to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Resetting the Auto Up Feature Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up Pull the window switch up and close the window com pletely then pull and hold the switch for one second Window Lockout Button The Window Lockout button on the driver s door allows you to disable the window controls on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the Window Lockout button To enable the window controls press the Window Lockout button again 021907160 Window Lockout Button 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE a Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting LIFTGATE To open the liftgate pull up squeeze on the handle and lift Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger or a key in the lock cylinder wi
72. the snowflake button on will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the defrost mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant during the summer to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recommended Refer to Recommended Fluids and Genuine Parts for the proper coolant type When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic in hot weather especially when towing a trailer ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 additional engine cooling may be required If this situa tion is encountered operate the transmission in a lower gear to increase engine RPM coolant flow and fan speed When stopped in heavy traffic it may be necessary to shift into NEUTRAL N and press the acceler
73. the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to 4 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom enable rear camera in reverse soft key mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView 5 Press the save soft key 6 When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE an image of NOTE If snow ice mud or anything else builds up on the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry check entire surroundings displayed across the top of with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens the screen After five seconds this note will disappear 7 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Turning ParkView On or Off Without HomeLink and power sunroof switches may also be Navigation Multimedia Radio included if equipped 1 Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key 3 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key 4 When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE an image of the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to check entire surroundings displayed across the top of the screen After five seconds this not
74. up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the WARNING inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat Lap Shoulder Belts belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badl
75. vehicle can cause damage to the dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios ru device and or to the connectors NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska WARNING System Activation Do not plug in or remove the iPod while driving Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you Failure to follow this warning could result in an may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio accident service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID
76. windshield This number also appears on the Automobile VIN Location Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equip ment 8 INTRODUCTION M VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl A Word About Your Keys 12 o Wireless Ignition Node WIN 12 ARY GOR PETRI 13 O Removing Key FOB From Ignition 13 H Key In Ignition Reminder 15 Nu Key cusosortiesesvieO Rete ks 15 O Replacement Keys d va m esti ir ded n 16 O Customer Key Programming 16 O General Information I7 ll Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped O Rearming The System o To Set The Alarm 223b eoe S o To Disarm The System Mi Illuminated Entry ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE o To Unlock The Doors o To Lock The Doors 2 60 42 42 D To Release The Liftgate Flipper Glass 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee D Remote Open Window Feature If O Power VIndONWS Ls sss reo E ORAS RERERE 29 Equipped 2 22 eee eee eee
77. with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie However if you haven t healed significantly within a WARNING few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like protect you in another collision Have the airbags particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC system serviced as well Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad vanced airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if mod
78. with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 22 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 23 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charging system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obt
79. 2 D Jump Starting Procedure usce Res 306 W Jacking And Tire Changing 304 W Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped B Sunc Flat Tiles go cop pet x 4G hse a BU Ed 304 Mi Towing A Disabled Vehicle W Jump Starting Procedures 304 302 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the switch bank just above the climate controls Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may run down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped shift the transmission to NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 303 CAUTION e Yo
80. 3 de 147 Core TODOS sca sap aci i es dpa saa CS ge nd 146 Cellular PRONE 5232 9 4954528 6445 545 83 225 Center High Mounted Stop Light 354 Chat We SINS wu aa eh anes en eee SEES 264 390 INDEX M Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 315 Checking Your Vehicle Por Safety aa 8404 04 244 71 CHECKS Odlely MP Pm 71 Child Restraint es mesa 2 56 s uA 60 61 66 68 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 65 66 lild oalety LOCKS e ED 28 Clean Air e oii Pr 283 Climate C OBBOL i ossd eere merUsws Pu ses eee 225 CIGGK PE 185 187 190 199 Cold Weather Operation ie cae Ow gop ea P os 209 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 224 Son 177 Compass Calibration asus R34 e ea 177 Compass Valance serasa daaar iaraa 178 Computer Trip Travel cs v odori Chaat ee es 171 Connector E EEEE ENEE ETE TEEN EET ones sess 210 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 210 Console Overhead eee 127 Contract Service 4 44454 4656 6305 KES RE SS 381 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 331 Cool SYSICMl cse ewe ea Rae ates s nee bee es 328 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 330 Coolant Capacity 5 c48k4ee4res ees epies 355 Coolant Level 2223 93 323 cIES PREGA 328 332 Disposal of Used Coolant 332 Drain Flush and Refill 329 lise erro PP 332 Points to Remember aux deum o oe dp ooo TIes 332 Pessu Cap 22494
81. 65 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 en F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 381 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Cus
82. ARTING AND OPERATING xe Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers E STARTING AND OPERATING 291 A weight distributing system works by applying lever WARNING age through spring lo
83. AT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information i in an emergency it should be replaced with the Selection Of Coolant specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as Use only the manufacturer s recommended coolant Re possible fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine taining Your Vehicle for further information coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator Continued 330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued e This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to 5 Years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replace ment To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding en
84. Amp B the left of the steering column Green 15 Amp Sunroof B Blue 10 Amp Htd Mirror EBL Red 20 Amp Rr Pwr Out B Yellow 10Amp Rr HVAC R O Red Commander Only Spare BY O 20 Amp Door Locks B Yellow Spre B S Fuse Panel 20 Amp Pwr Outlet B Yellow 342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cartridge Mini ae Cartridge Mini aT 14 10 10 Amp Final Drive Control Cigar Ltr R A Red Module FDCM ce Vereen Tire Pressure Tran IE S ODGTUOLIITIB sponders R O HVAC Rear Heated Sat Sich O T m Heater Ventilation C t Cl ie Air Conditioning E vendis HVAC Relay Rear B Park Assist I a Amp Flipper Glass B ue Ho Spare BH CG me Red Lamps IP Court i qud Red 20 10 Amp Steering Column Con Lamp B4 Red trol Module SCCM ae 10 Amp Autowipe R A ie a et Red MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343 Underhood Fuses Power Distribution Center Meus r Il Mi 22 15 Amp _ Rear Wiper B Blue 24 10 Amp _ Power Distribution Red Center PDC Relays P Powertrain Control 5 Module A580 R S 4 5 25 10 Amp Shifter Assy BTSI 5 am Red rans Case Switch he ESP ABS Trailer Power Distribution Center vey ae ela Alege Mini Description Fuse Fuse a D PTC Heater 1 Diesel Only 344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE el PIC mE 2 Diesel Green ES iem ee mre er prom Pink 40 Amp Rear Window De 50 Amp PTC Heater 3 Diesel Green froster EBL H
85. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles a few kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333 If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing e If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corro
86. CSCSC CSC is PECONI 2 29 49992 0 IRR ERRAT EIS 156 viri eroris P 24 238 Automatic ITANSMUSSION a acre sepe ee ses a 238 Cold Weather 2s cs x9 f E ob a Ros on ied qi 239 Engine Fails to Start sd anon bur ages 239 zu 4 ice 24 Steering POWE 2445464 4 40 6 RR Cdp d eae 248 249 TCO 2 eeeece ve osbeee bees eed ae ES 113 Wheel Tilt acer ho E SES ES dG RES 113 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Sonn APT 223 dms 348 Storage Behind the Seat 12339 93 94 9x dC e sed d 144 OE Dill 29 52 d eb a OUR HE oe eee Nl 144 Storage Compartment Center Seat 93 Storage Venice 624454664465 tiea eee es 233 348 Storing Your Vehicle 426464 642 x ARR oe oe oh 348 DUM KOO Pv oe 135 Dee lasses Storage 4 2 4 cue E on oh r4 VER PPS 128 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 45 Sway CODD Mailer sasssa tae ors bare oe we 260 System Remote Starting Lus 4404 6 cane Hee nss 24 Ta DOMET PPP ood oe ee eins 159 Telescoping Steering Column 113 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 225 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 162 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 65 Thet Oye AN ox oud uro s are TIREE 17 Thett System Disarming sacesa cic ah re RE RES 18 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 2e ee me ing x oh mee 146 Tile Steere COMMA s rs24 dore RE Ye tm en tu 119 Time Delay Headlight dos acids d anre 9 Roe E 107 Tire and Loading Information Placard
87. CTION SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol or Francais Then as you con tinue the information will display in the selected lan guage 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE The EVIC will not change the Uconnect lan guage selection Please refer to Language Selection in Uconnect Phone for details Auto Door Locks When YES Y is selected all of the doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears Auto Unlock On Exit When YES Y is selected all of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is se lected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press app
88. DERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button unt
89. E STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts For typical installation instruc tions refer to Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces EET Latch Anchorages ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat Tether Strap Mounting Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps o
90. EED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE EENENENENEENEEEEEEEENEEEENENNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNI ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire O Traction Grades was xps emi e tuns e TR 385 ay Grade C here ee Oh oe 385 oO Treadwear 4 met be eae Oe PES SES HESS eS 385 Temperate Grades ts eos een ee ae ii 386 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 379 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally i
91. EFT REAR DOOR OPEN B Omad 81c433bc 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 2 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE OW If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The ligh
92. Express Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction is detected the sunroof will automatically re tract Remove the obstruction if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing the sunroof press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move toward the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof
93. Front Right Rear for three seconds and a graphic display of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 280 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR TIRE 35 34 PSI 24 amp 34 8197133c Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure The system will automatically update the graphic dis play of the pressure value s will stop flashing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure s have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information Check TPM System Message The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds This text message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor s is not being received NOTE Your system can be set to display
94. G Sampling NE Pit Rate bs 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system
95. G THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED ParkSense provides visible and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and the detected obstacle when backing up Refer to the Warning Section and Note Section for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will remember the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will be active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will be active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph 16 km h ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 to 59 in 30 to 150 cm from the rear fascia in the horizontal direction depending on the location and orientation of the obstacle and the type of obstacle 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ParkSense Warning Display When the ignition is turned to the ON position the The ParkSense warning display located in the headliner warning display will turn ON all of its LEDs for about near the flipper glass provide
96. GO AREA WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Continued belts e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect
97. Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS MOPARS fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer ee FYOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 383 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government shou
98. ICLE 55 Front and Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Ad ditional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and provide verification Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If a Deployment Occurs The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact
99. Intervals W Maintenance Schedules Lise 360 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 360 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Ba
100. ND VONHTILATIO FAN LOWER iiit OLET a v 4 Sie Doe TRUK DECH aum Cen Tee AS EASE N cO 4 SLOG DOOR EMERGENCY LiGHTEIN RELEASE HANDLE Am lt a DOC ALIAS DONVERTISLE CDMWVERTIELE TOP HWH TOP ue a of DOOR LOCE Bae rena FT NSE PRESSURE MONTTOR 3 n COHYEHTISLE TRACTION A Wei DON Eres THE KLECTHONIC WHT DUE THROTTLE CONTROL Ji we ee TERIER Acca amp 7a ME AND TETHER Fo UCONNELCT CHRLOREN TATEM BUTTON m SEE OVERS MA MAR a Lay ESP BAS ELECTIOMIC STABILTEY TRANE ELECTRONEG PROGRAM SPEED CONTROL wg Svi 2 9 SYETEM HILL DESCENT ARIES heats CONTHOR AWD A ALL HERL FAILUHE OF AM eH DRIVE EHLARMM ETSILW JWD BRAKE FRU WHEEL WARNING PARRING SINE BRAKE TOW HAUL Vea prep TE e BL 4 LOW HAZARD Fola WHEL ORRE LOW A c PUSH OFF vt UBTABILITY Tey DNYHOL OFF 010507683 Ne INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on a label located on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of the vehicle through the
101. NDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu WARNING Continued rity Alarm is active e Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan WARNING gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people pets or other Programming HomeLink objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use Before You Beei this transceiver with a garage door opener that has Siculo ab mp M a stop and reverse feature as required by federal If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons safety standards This includes most garage door all channels before you begin training opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for up use a garage door opener without these safety to 20 seconds The EVIC will display CLEARING features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC mes Internet at www HomeLink com for safety infor sage states CHANNELS CLEARED mation or assistance while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being copied to Continued 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M HomeLink for more efficie
102. OOR OPEN with graphic e SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM e HOOD GATE DOORS OPEN with graphic e TRANSMISSION OVER TEMP e LIFTGLASS DOOR OPEN with graphic e LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL e LIFTGLASS DOORS OPEN with graphic e WARNING LIMIT SPEED e LIFTGLASS HOOD OPEN with graphic e CHECK GASCAP e WASHER FLUID LOW with graphic e ESP OFF e COOLANT LOW with graphic e JOD FUSE OUT e UPSHIFT with graphic e MEMORY 1 POSITIONS SET e CHECK GAUGES e MEMORY 2 POSITIONS SET 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED SEATBELT BUCK LED with graphic MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED VEHICLE NOT IN PARK DRIVER 1 MEMORY DRIVER 2 MEMORY ADJ PEDALS DISABLED CRUISE CONTROL SET ADJ PEDALS DISABLED SHIFTER IN REVERSE TIRE LOW PRESSURE CHECK TPM SYSTEM LEFT FRONT LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM Sys tem Only RIGHT FRONT LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM Sys tem Only e LEFT REAR LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM System Only RIGHT REAR LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM Sys tem Only Stereo if equipped with Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS Video Surround if equipped with Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS Audio Surround if equipped with Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS 0 60 mph 0 100 km h if equipped with Performance Pages Braking Distance if equipped with Performance Pages 1 8 Mile if equipped with Performance Pages ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 e 1 4 Mile if equipp
103. Panel for further information Automatic Door Locks If this feature is selected your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h and all doors are closed It will reset whenever a door is opened This feature is selectable and can be turned on or off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Child Protection Door Lock The rear doors of your vehicle are equipped with Child Protection Door Locks If you push up on the lever on the open edge of the door it cannot be opened from the inside of the vehicle Push the lever down to disengage the Child Protection Door Locks WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection Door Locks are engaged ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 passenger rear passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position Child Protection Door Lock WINDOWS Power Windows The power window controls are located on the driver s door trim panel There is a single switch on the front passenger door rear doors which operates the front 021907161 Power Window Switches The power window switches remain active for up to 10 minute
104. Performance Sound System With Equipped REN RER RBZ RES Radios Only 215 Driver Selectable Surround DSS D 5ystem ACUVaON a uus 4 84 de PR ones 219 BEEP Pee nevesesuepastted todtaguntetees en D Electronic Serial Number Sirius m jn x m D 223 Identification Number ESN SID 216 E eee O Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite ARACO pane WHO Cras su eee PG a ee ES PE SS 216 siib ce ee T O Satellite Antenna 000000 0e 216 I CD DVD Disc Maintenance 224 B Recep OuUaltiB s c su aite our 23d PUR e i 217 W Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 225 O Operating Instructions Uconnect Mm Climate Controls seasea y ea ede 225 NECN OAC MAGE Lg t idees detail ne DO Automatic Temperature Control 225 1 1 a a eal a a EVOperatine lips 4 4 4 aur ierre Soe x dod oo 232 FEgUPpPEd sd ken eae Raat done ed oe a 8s 219 Operating ps Chait seaex4esteEra prisa 234 154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SS INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 81c03f57 Air Outlet 5 Upper Switch Bank 9 Lower Switch Bank 2 Instrument Cluster 6 Power Outlet Cigar Lighter 10 Climate Controls 3 Radio 7 Storage Bin 11 Ignition Switch 4 Glove Compartment 8 Power Outlet 12 Storage Bin UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER T m tur e yd EUST lt 7S 215 85 E 245 f e L
105. Preset 6 Podcasts e Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See e To Exit List mode without selecting a track press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode LIST button The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item you wish to select and press the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the iPod then you can follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are available on this system MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 Uconnect Multimedia SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN RER RBZ RES RADIOS ONLY Leaving the iPod or any supported device any Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to alter the operation or damage the device Follow coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite the device manufacturer s guidelines Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music Placing items on the iPod or connections to the Sports news entertainment and programming for chil iPod in the
106. RK ASSIST DISABLED Further more once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST DISABLED mes sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE ParkSense when on will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone If a ParkSense system malfunction occurs a single chime will sound once per ignition cycle In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM If this occurs making sure the rear fascia bumper is free from snow ice mud dirt and debris see your autho rized dealer ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 e Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly ParkSense might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper Objects must not be within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message to be displayed in the instrumen
107. S ESSE SR ZU NS ES 65 66 li c 79 Lead Free Gasoline ized duree tis da 282 Leaks PHHO 222 9949 5 259 ROE eee EO eas 73 Life OF TICS ono bot oes s hs n parie RUP des rd 277 linc ng phe HAS eo Gane owe ane TT 32 Liftgate Flipper Glass cae eos dex gue S hae ety as 33 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 148 ES DEDUS o eere a Cee d sae 73 E i 4 aut eee bbe eee pee ee SETETE 73 100 PIMOS cae ha Gaal gee eee 2 46 53 58 73 159 ALOCE sone pehe ashe ve ora hens E E 159 Automatic Headlights 223 deat epo onmes 101 PAKUD 242444 bees ee ye eee ae ee eee ee 952 Batiely DAVEE 2 4448 93 Rope K S PE Ehe Bees 104 Brake Assist Warning 3 44 2840 itaatten 163 260 Drake Warning 4 527 sc00e ee ne O84 ITI CCS 156 bulb Replacement 2544 444624244 terii ep 349 soo rrn 143 Center Mounted SIOP uos qudd dedu triatus 354 CESS 4240558454555 pee bee SUETON EE E 164 Daytime RUNNING uud sa seca ob dex 3m ves 103 Dimmer Switch Headlight 100 106 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator oe 2 euo eh xm SERE R 160 163 260 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 165 EXUBIOE ea iaa dad Bore ue ORE Be ird Poon es 73 FOS J TIT 105 165 352 PUCCS P D D CD 341 Hazard Warning Flasher 302 Headlight Switch Sus aruda 4 RECS T ex 100 TiCAGMeS T 349 350 Headlights On With Wipers 101 High Beam Indieatot b 42042584 ERES oe
108. Shift Interlock System 241 W Power Steering 000 248 236 STARTING AND OPERATING ee O Power Steering Fluid Check 24 222a 249 E Due Wigs 2 99 9 ERR eee ea eae 262 Bar ine Brake 22955922 ce REPE HA 250 D Tire Identification Number TIN 266 W Anti Lock Brake System 252 O Tire Terminology And Definitions 267 Mi Electronic Brake Control System 299 O Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 268 O Anti Lock Brake System ABS 255 W Tires General Information 272 OB Traction Control System TCS 255 O Run Flat Tires 2244 0 63339 CERE ob eee 4 272 G Brake Assist System BAS 256 O Tire Pressure 1 ee ee 272 O Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 257 O Tire Inflation Pressures 274 O Electronic Stability Program ESP 257 oO Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 275 o Trailer Sway Control TSC ios mes 260 O Radial Ply DHBS uana rece aee cereri 279 0 ESP BAS Warning Light And ESP TCS DTC SPINS svecees san veeh464 4484 o4 276 IDUGSIOELIDUI ssa Pence tees ee ues ae O Tread Wear Mmdicators ss 9 v4ea sae 4 risi 276 B Tire Safety Information 262 Alite Of Tire 2x59 ease she hs XS 27 7 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 237 PURepidcemient TES e dea RS IHRER RE CE 2d H Carbon Monoxide Warnings 286 li Tire Rotation Recommendations 2D WE COs
109. Surround mode is described under KICKER Mobile Surround KMS1 Please note that DSS effects are dependent on the mix of the original recording Some audio will sound better in DSS modes others in Stereo mode When in Audio Surround mode balance is set auto matically Fader control is available to add more sur round audio if desired The removable subwoofer is located in the rear cargo area and is fastened in place using the child restraint anchors located on the left rear passenger seatback ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 Installing The Subwoofer 2 Align the left outside edge of the subwoofer with the outside edge of the inner cargo tie down hook 1 Lower the left rear passenger seat 046405466 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See 3 Slide the subwoofer toward the front of the vehicle so Removing The Subwoofer 046405467 4 t the electrical tor i Connect the electrical connector 2 Disconnect the electrical connector 5 Fold the left rear passenger seat rearward into the upright position The rear tether anchors should engage the hooks located on the back of the subwoofer 3 Remove the subwoofer ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045003761 Remote Sound System Controls Back Vi
110. T Hy brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operat ing conditions the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 10725 and are approved to MB 229 3 or MB 229 5 The manufacturer recom mends the use of a full synthetic 5W 40 or equivalent engine oil Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs PLZTR5A 13 Gap 0 040 in 1 01 mm Fuel Selection Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 Chassis Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Transfer Case MOPAR NV146 Transfer Case Fluid or equivalent Usage of other fluid lubricants is NOT recommended Axle Differential Front Rear MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 140 API GL5 or equivalent Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only rec ommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir This system requires the use of MOPAR Hydraulic System Power Steer ing Fluid or equivalent which meets Chrysler Material Standard MS 10838 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Mi Emissions Control System Maintenance 360 H Required Maintenance
111. T PANEL M 16 Digit Character Display News News Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Program Type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected with
112. TE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the Overhead console This is where the compass sensor is located 040506040 N vU LA Compass Variance Map 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press the MENU button until Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu is reached 3 Press the SCROLL button until Compass Variance is displayed in the EVIC ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to change the variance number Continue until desired number is reached 5 Press either MENU SCROLL or COMPASS TEMP button to set the value and exit Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS If Equipped Press and release the MENU button until Surround Sound displays in the EVIC The EVIC provides infor mation on the current surround mode e Stereo e Audio Surround While in the Surround Sound menu press the FUNC TION SELECT button to change surround modes Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following ru choices Language When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the Uconnect gps if equipped Press the FUN
113. The Easy Entry Exit feature will be automatically dis the instrument panel and in front of the driver s door abled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0 9 in 23 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory The Easy Entry Exit feature is enabled or later disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information En p p Hood Release Handle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 2 Reach under the hood move safety latch to the left CAUTION and lift the hood To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death 031305631 Safety Latch Location 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE LIGHTS Multifunction L
114. The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folde
115. There are also reading lights located above the rear doors Each light can be turned on by pressing the front recessed area of the lens To turn these lights off press the recessed area of the lens a second time 813ac107 Front Map Reading Lights ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield Wiper Operation The windshield wiper washer control lever is located on Rotate the end of the lever upward to the LO position for the right side of the steering column The front wipers are low speed wiper operation operated by rotating a switch located on the end of the lever For information on the rear wiper washer refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle Rotate the end of the lever upward to the HI position for high speed wiper operation 031507503 036407502 Front Wiper Control Windshield Wiper Washer Switch 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the park position If the windshield wiper switch is turned off and the blades cannot return to the park position damage to the wiper motor may occur Intermittent Wiper System Use one of the five intermittent wiper speeds when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable Turn the end of the lever to one of t
116. U nese ex Sede arde N Bar ee ee 32l Poeme OIL DISDOSdl a sauces p ore vp Een x SPA guam C 337 Flashers 4 cher vue Me aaa 302 Hazard Warming a 2x9 29 ye 3e dE RE REY 302 Toth Digna MR 73 157 351 352 Flipper Glass Liftgate ssec ves opens eves 33 Flooded Engine Staring 2a ex vx rae prd 239 Fluid Brake 1422923 930 49x 3 494 334 Pid Capacities rripi pubis S0 d 9 det dap acd 355 NS INDEX 393 Idisi MEI REP T 73 Fluid Level Checks lol TP 334 Cooling SVSICM Scscect ark Roe dod RCRERUPUS R de V aoe os 328 EXP Il so ice e qd xe A ucbua d e Mure ages 318 Power SICH 4 cars no 4 99 95 993 ays P 249 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 356 Fop Light Senne 2622654 e EARS CARSSE ERAS 352 FOC BIB stuchee ite RP STPTIA E se 105 165 352 Folding Rear Scat sepeser niria ak HOG aE Oe e Four Way Hazard Flasher wes acne en 302 Freeing A SUCK Vehiel amp 25 44 eu ERROR Eb 244 Front Heated Seats as cuan en Ede US ges ees aos 88 Piel 3 9202 52V 9 Pura REG RI Sob E do eua 282 hob P C 285 a opu ss yeh ee ed eA eae A 283 ENOO MP ooh eee eee ee ees 283 Piller Cap Gas Cap ace 969 2065 94 95 25 6a t 287 eo eee aes 202 e o CTI 165 Materials Added 223 des dur pirata Reese E 285 NMIOEnanDI csi gent Yess 2 eos es eee eee NE 283 Oddane OBS a uxo Sc s eos V C3 eames 282 REQUIFCHICING 2 3 54 uw 99 xA ESSE Bae S 202 995 lank Capaciiy 36430 ot qodod oe tatimit ees 99D Fuel System Caton 4x muce ous
117. UNE control knob functions e Press the SCAN button to use iPod scan mode which in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod will play the first five seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the SCAN button again During Scan mode you can also press the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to select the previous and next tracks e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclock wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During e RND button available on sales code RES radio only fast scroll you may notice a slight delay in updating Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and the information on the radio display e During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel backwards counter clockwise to get to the track faster e In List mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists e Preset 3 Albums e Preset 4 Genres e Preset 5 Audiobooks e
118. accelerated e Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions e Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is en gaged 248 STARTING AND OPERATING M e The transmission will automatically shift up when NOTE maximum engine speed is reached while AutoStick is engaged e Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible
119. ad bars They are typically used e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to system may reduce handling stability braking the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When performance and could result in an accident used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it Weight distributing hitch systems may not be provides for a more level ride offering more consistent compatible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for addi also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and tional information contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements 202 STARTING AND OPERATING M Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Dut 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium 3 500 lbs 1 587 kg Dut Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should
120. adio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M MPEG Sampling Feet Pit Rate pe 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer t
121. adjusted could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision The head restraints should always be checked prior to operating the vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion Always adjust the head restraints when the vehicle is in PARK Front Heated Seats If Equipped The front driver and passenger seats are heated The controls for each heater are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel below the heater air conditioning controls The heaters provide the same average heat level for both the cushion and the seatback After turning the ignition ON you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off Press the switch once to select High level heat ing Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off When the High level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal High level If the High level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to Low level after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The Low level setting will turn Off automatically
122. ain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an authorized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 24 Low Fuel Warning Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 3 U S Gallons 8 7 Liters this light will come on and remain on until fuel is added The Low Fuel Warning Light may turn on and off again especially during and after hard braking accelerations or turns This occurs due to the shifting of the fuel in the tank ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster aT qu m s a e Electronic Vehicle Information Center The EVIC consists of the following System Status Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Compass Display Outside Temperature Display Trip Computer Functions Surround Sound Modes If Equipped with Driver Selectable Surround DSS Performance Pages if equipped UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel MENU Button Press and release the MENU button and the mode displayed will change between Trip Functions Personal Settings and System Sta tus FUNCTION SELECT Button Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to select the displayed
123. and pull out the end of the multifunction lever A light in the instrument cluster shows when the fog lights are on 031407550 Front Fog Light Control NOTE e Turning on the high beam headlights turns off the fog lights e A front fog light is a lighting device that provides illumination in front of the vehicle under conditions of fog rain snow or dust The front fog lights supple ment the low beams of a standard headlight system e Proper aim and adjustment of the front fog lights should be made to prevent excessive glare for other drivers 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 031407551 Turn Signal Control NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash to Pass
124. and right Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position everyone for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbag 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag Children 12 years old and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or b
125. ange the engine oil and engine oil engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 367 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a E a a d Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Drain the transfer case and refill Inspect the accessory drive belt s replace if necessary Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102 000 miles 170 000 km Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Da
126. ant recovery bottle causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any pressure accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result 332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine off and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this
127. any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in the rear outboard seating position Children 12 years old and younger should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt from the buckle and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensi tive emergency locking mode ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped The seat belts for both front seating positions may be equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are
128. arage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning the vehicle Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 287 ADDING FUEL CAUTION Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the driver s side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impu rities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting after market cap can cause the Malfunction Indi cator Light MIL to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank af
129. as a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Start ing in What to Do In Emergencies for further information the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Continued 240 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after t
130. as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 2 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 5 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zo
131. ator slightly for fast idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an automatic recirculation system When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions it may use partial Recirculation A C mode to provide additional comfort Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstructions Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air condi tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SS Operating Tips Chart WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS HOT WEATHER VERY HOT COOL OR COLD HUMID CONDITIONS 08 4 64650 640 LA COLD DRY CONDITIONS o Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level i and turn on AVC Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise oet the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle set the Mode control to Recirculate with A C on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to
132. ature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming another vehicle or other objects Use your inside mirror and can be turned on or off by pressing the button mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle at the base of the inside mirror The mirrors will auto seen in the passenger side mirror matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Power Outside Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver s door trim panel next to the power door lock switch A rotary knob selects the left mirror right mirror or off position After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move Use the off center position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position ur Power Mirror Switch Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle for further information ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED To access an illuminated vanity mirror flip down one of Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User the sun visors Manual located on the DVD for further details Lift the cover to reveal the mirror The light will turn
133. ause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The adjust able pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position The position of the brake and accelerator pedals can be adjusted without compromising safety or comfort in actuating the pedals Adjustable Pedal Switch Press the bottom of the switch to move the pedals forward away from the driver Press the top of the switch to move the pedals rearward toward the driver e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 e The pedals can be adjusted while driving CAUTION e The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE R or when the Electronic Speed Control is on A message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked diucespie pedals oath out Adjustable Pedal Disabled Cruise Control uni acl hima Set or Adjustable Pedal Disabled Shifter In Re verse Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC
134. bag Features 47 4 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The H Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls 51 WENICIG 24 Lose Ru eee weet SEPA SECRET SE 72 O Event Data Recorder EDR 58 O Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make p Chile BesttalbIs vue emed oor gee ae 60 UES OE See pee a arene 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three of which are detented and one spring loaded The detented positions are LOCK ACC and ON The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automati cally returns to the detented ON position Wireless Ignition Node WIN LOCK 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON 4 START Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead The emergency
135. be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg Heavy Dut Fifth Wheel Greater than 10 000 Ibs Gooseneck 4 540 kg Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 293 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine GCWR Gross Combined Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Max Trailer Tongue Transmission Wt Rating Trailer Wt Wt See Note 6 1L Automatic 8 800 Ibs 3 992 kg 35 sq ft 3 25 sq m 3 500 lbs 1 587 kg 308 Ibs 140 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information Trailer and Trailer Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the wei
136. bs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind the back ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint t
137. call is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC To recall the memory settings for driver one press MEMORY button number 1 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press MEMORY button number 2 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons on the drivers door during a recall S 1 or 2 When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat driver s mirror and the pedals stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected To Disable a RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 2 Press and release MEMORY button number 1 The system will recall any memory settings stored in position 1 Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3 3 Press and release the memory S SET button located on the driver s door 4 Within five seconds press and release MEMORY button 1 on the driver s door 5 Within five seconds press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either memory position repeat steps 1 through 5 f
138. cator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged A CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened The message will remain displayed until the vehicle diagnostic system can retest the fuel system The test will perform the next time the vehicle is started if the vehicle was keyed off above 40 F 4 C outside temperature and the following vehicle start is above 40 F 4 C outside temperature It may be possible to have a message that will not cl
139. ch is not turned to It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or the LOCK position first NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle PARK opeca T your tootis not firmiy on the prake pedal This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply sisi ne Sex dae ccc d and when Toar ook ae the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range fi 5 1 h ds ke bed A y Always apply the parking brake first then place the shift ra IHE eee Pieces lever into the PARK position the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the Gear Ranges NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position before restarting 244 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should apply the park brake shift the transmission into PARK and remove the key fob from the ignition switch Once the key fob is removed from the ignition switch t
140. commended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNINCG e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your pri per D P 379 O Prepare For The Appointment 9 9 APrepare A List 44444 deed apne ade rra 379 o Be Reasonable With Requests 379 W If You Need Assistance 979 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 380 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 380 Hn Medco Contactes aa x Ee xc hee a uas 380 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 381 EESOPUIOO CONUGC s sawa casas ae eee nes aos 381 ll Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 382 E MOPAR Parts aceoesa cade quc carer da 382 W Reporting Safety Defects 382 O In The 50 United States And Washington pP pr 382 0 n Canada B Publication Order Forms 3 8 IF YOU N
141. could be injured by these fumes Keep the flipper glass closed when you are operating the vehicle Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen ger Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window if equipped Supplemental Side Seat Airbags if equipped An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event if equipped If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
142. cted the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal High level If the High level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to Low level after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The Low level setting will turn Off automatically after approximately 30 min utes Press the switch once to select High level heat ing Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt CAUTION within two to five minutes Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes 60 40 Split Rear Seat I spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise To Lower Rear Seat care when using the seat heater It may cause burns Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for even at low temperatures especially if used for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating long periods of time room Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause
143. d remove the ex tender and store it ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Airbags This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint 1 Driver Airbag systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the m iR E da Knee Bolster center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 81c0f01e 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a win dow If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags they are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE Airbag cov
144. d be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 WARNING Continued e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CAR
145. d its contact with these surfaces Continued 336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating condi tions If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe damage to the transmission may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to accurately adjust the fluid level Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants eee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337 Washing CAUTION e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels com
146. d vsu ele Yee 9 e a ees 349 Replacement Keys 25 2006 26050208449 Borea 16 Replacement Paris uoa ve tienes pu P eas 317 Replacement HfeS i eece a PREPARA REESE 277 Reporting Satety Defects a cess mte 382 Restraints Child 22e 43e tU CREE EUR 60 ISeSttouEo JCCUDaN wigs xoxo get atop dire d a 34 Retractable Cargo Area Cover 144 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 22 xr 935 244 ROU Over VW ANOS 1 5 42 404 ea oa eee ees PE 4 Rotation Tires ich Ee d be ee ee Re ee d 278 Run Flat Teal visegs450eneeeen ene PES 272 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle suce sued aed rig in 2 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 73 Satety Detects Reporting 13 2 2e adie dongs ds 382 Safety Exhaust Gas 6 uo dso a ode noes ant a das Zl Safety Information Tire usua eu e paure anne Peor 262 voi go CP rrr ral Satellite Radio Antenna 4aecceadeee pre ERES 216 Satellite Radio Uconnect studios 215 Schedule Maintenance leen 360 Seat Belt Reminder ue rues ecd xu PRRRET ES 43 Seat Belts za 99m hone RR AME GR RUE x na 36 72 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 41 And Pregnant Women ice sce ede cam nag ss 44 Child Restraint naana annaa 60 68 ac 2 2 6 a E PEE ee ee ee 44 POM Cal 243 999954229 94949 ENAERE 36 PO O 2432 E ERT fps df nate os ip en INDEX 401 Maintenance x2 5 4995 92 959 x 9492 9 24 5 340 gister PRES oS RRS 43 R MINGer ues 4455204 R3 XP RS ES 460 aes 164 Shoulder Belt Anchora
147. diately e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for approximately six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned ON e The light remains on after the approximate six to eight second interval e The light comes on and remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment if applicable and up to a quarter second of either high speed deceleration data or change in velocity during and or after airbag deployment or near deployment EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and is otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may
148. do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat For the outboard seating positions route the tether over the head rests and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat WARNING Always remove the subwoofer from the vehicle whenever the tether anchors behind the subwoofer are required for proper installation of a child re Tether Strap Mounting straining device In the event of an accident or under severe vehicle maneuvers leaving the subwoofer unsecured in the vehicle could result in serious or fatal injury to anyone in the vehicle 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets shoul
149. e system will recall any stored settings Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3 3 Adjust the driver s seat recliner and driver s sideview mirror to the desired positions 4 Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired positions 5 Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets up 3 to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set 6 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the Key 7 Press and release the S SET button located on the driver s door 8 Within five seconds press and release MEMORY button 1 or 2 on the driver s door The next step must be performed within five seconds if you desire to also use a RKE transmitter to recall memory positions 9 Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE transmitters 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie 10 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position 11 Select Remote Linked to Memory in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and enter Yes Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 12 Repeat the above steps to set the next memory position using the other numbered memory button or to link another RKE transmitter to memory Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a re
150. e Seat Belts The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary For seat belts having an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough allowance to pass it through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is fully extended from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Refer to Automatic Locking Mode In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to
151. e certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts CAUTION e Do nottow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Continued 296 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Continued 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized WARNING Continued e Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on Towing Requirements Tires This requirement may limit the ability to alway
152. e disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler Group LLC product 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data parameters that are recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system e Vehicle speed e Engine RPM e Brake switch status e Pedal position e And other configuration parameters depending on vehicle Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you hav
153. e driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensi tive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity Settings 4 and 5 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system NOTE e The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high speed position e The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield e Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance e A customer programmable feature in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC allows the Rain Sensing feature to be turned off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms and will not operate under the following conditions e Low Ambient Temperature Whe
154. e engine oil and engine oil filter L Replace the engine air cleaner filter _J Drain the transfer case and refill _J Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule I Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 366 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or Schedule 54 Months Maintenance 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the T Ch
155. e headlamps are turned on there is a blue hue to the lamps This dimin ishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges 1 High Beam Bulb 3 Turn Signal Bulb 2 Low Beam Bulb 073305864 Halogen Headlamps If Equipped 1 Open the hood 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the 2 Turn the low or high beam bulb one quarter turn bulb counterclockwise to remove from housing MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil J ud 2 contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Front Turn Signal 1 Open the hood 2 Turn the turn signal bulb one quarter turn counter clockwise to remove from housing 1 High Beam Bulb 3 Turn Signal Bulb 2 Low Beam Bulb 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol bulb with rubbing alcohol Front Fog Lamp Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup Lamps 1 Reach behi
156. e positive end of the jumper cable to the positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery and the fuel injection system WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 308 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the discharged vehicle 10 Reinstall the air intake duc
157. e should be ob tained WARNING Do not exceed 50 mph 80 km h if the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light is illuminated Vehicle handling and braking may be reduced You could have an accident and be severely or fatally injured NOTE The run flat feature eliminates the need for a spare tire and jack This vehicle is not equipped with either a spare tire or jack JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur a WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 305 WARNING Preparations for Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the When temperatures are below the freezing point engine compartment behind the left headlight assembly electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rup ture or explode and cause personal injury Battery temperature must be b
158. e the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint an chorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat An chorage System Infants and Child Restraints WARNING e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passen e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible chi
159. e will disappear 5 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the audio screen appears again 8125e191 Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights storage for sunglasses Universal Garage Door Opener At the forward end of the console are two courtesy reading lights 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Press the lens to turn these lights on Press a second time to turn the lights off The lights also turn on when a front door or rear door is opened The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compartment access is a push push de sign Push the finger depression on the overhead console to open Push the finger depression to close GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons are located in the overhead console and contain one two or three dots lines desig nating the different HomeLink channels HomeLink Buttons ee UNDERSTA
160. ear due to the test being disabled due to low outside temperatures If the test is performed and the problem is gone the message will disappear If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off See your authorized dealer for service MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration C5 nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test For states that require an Inspection and Mainte 316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position
161. ears Sound Horn with Lock When YES Y is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamps with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 Flash Lamps with Lock When YES Y is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SE LECT button until YES Y or NO N appears Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Auto High Beams Available with SmartBeam Only When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Understand ing The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Headlamps On with Wipers Available with Automatic Headlamps Only When YES
162. eated Red Only Mirror 30 Amp Cig em Trail Tow 30 Amp Rear HVAC If Pink Batt TCM _ 3 40 Amp Power Liftgate Com Sere Green mander Only NINE mnm m 40 Amp NE Starter JB e Red Green 17 30 Amp ABS Pump 20 Amp Front Power Win Pink Blue dows MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345 Pe Ee Green Seats Green en Export DERI L Pink ABS Valves 20 Amp Fuel Pump siwe Yellow 20 Amp PCM Batt Gasoline 22 20 Amp TCM A C Clutch Yellow Only Yellow Spa Natural E 15 Amp Powertrain Control NN 20 Amp Rear Heated Seats Blue Module Diesel Only Yellow 29 20Amp Final Drive Control 20Amp Final Drive Control Yellow Module FDCM Yellow Module FDCM E Diff 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE use Fuse Fuse Fuse an a an 25 Amp e u i port Onl a Spare Spare Underhood Fuses Integrated Power Module m Amp Ignition Switch Yellow 20Amp HID Left Yellow 39 20Amp HID Right Yellow 40 25 Amp Next Generation Con Natural troller NGC Injec tors 20Amp Subwoofer SRT LL Only o Integrated Power Module MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 Red Yellow port Only MENU railer Tow Park ES Front Ea Module Red Lamps Yellow FCM Batt 1 ie ee Red Yellow Turn aioe FCM Batt 4 Yellow da Batt 3 Yellow FCM Batt 2 Yellow Turn MOD 20 Amp Ft Fog Lamps Yellow 50 Amp Radiator Fan Red 20 Amp Horn Yellow 20 Amp Adjustable P
163. ecrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be se
164. ected service interval Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT but ton until YES Y or NO N appears Easy Entry Exit Seat Available with Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect Phone if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or
165. ed The system uses the factory mated Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine After turning the ignition switch to the ON position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Ke
166. ed by an authorized dealer 8 Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute RPM 9 Vehicle Security Light This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 10 Oil Pressure Warning Light zi This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A continuous chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 11 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion apply as little throttle as possible While driving ease up on the accelerator Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road con ditions and do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program ESP or Traction Control System TCS 12 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided l should be checked monthly when cold and
167. ed for most driving situations ESP should only be turned to Partial Off mode for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESP except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESP function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momentarily press the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation 054806028 ESP OFF Switch NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the ESP Partial 260 STARTING AND OPERATINC M Off mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the ESP Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momen tarily pressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion Trailer Sway Control TSC TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may reduce engine power and a
168. ed then fade to off The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition after you close all the doors NOTE None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position unless the overhead map reading lights are turned on manually REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE transmitter however the buttons on the remaining RKE transmitters will continue to work Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 021408059 Key Fob with Three Button RKE Transmitter To Unlock the Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors The turn signal lamps will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driv
169. ed with Performance Pages e Trip A e Instantaneous G Force if equipped with Performance e Trip B Pages Elapsed Time e Peak G Force if equipped with Performance Pages e RKE BATTERY LOW e VEHICLE NOT IN PARK e IGNITION POSITION e PRESS BRAKE TO START e Service Distance e Engine Oil Pressure e Engine Oil Temperature 4 e Display Units of Measure In Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip e INSERT KEY Computer functions e TURN TO ON The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the e Distance To Empty DTE following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is Dist To Empt e Distance 10 Empty determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a LOW FUEL message This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle wil
170. edal Final Drive Control Yellow Module FDCM 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cartridge Mini m 27 15 Amp Ignition Off Draw Blue IOD 1 Intrusion Module Satellite Video Steering Con trol Module 20Amp Ignition Off Draw Yellow IOD 2 Radio 10Amp Occupant Restraint Red Controller ORC R S 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Red Controller ORC R O VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may e Remove fuse 27 in the Intelligent Power Module labeled Ignition Off Draw IOD 1 e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Lights Bulb Type Glove Dox Lati D ss 4423 44 CIERRE ade a 194 Grab Handle Lamp L002825W5W Overhead Console Reading Lamps VT4976 Rear SO LODS xw hr wee EU EC RON 214 2 Visor Vanity Lamp sses ee hoo dog oe eae kiN V26377 Underpanel Courtesy Lamps 906 Instrument Cluster General Illumination 103 T lltate7 Hazard Lamps a den ober E wp
171. ee STARTING AND OPERATING 247 When in the AutoStick mode as the engine RPM nears the engine maximum speed an UPSHIFT message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC portion of your instrument cluster This message appears in order to alert the driver that the engine speed is approaching it s maximum value and a upshift to the next gear is required In the event that the driver does not upshift the engine control system will automatically do it for the driver Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Shifting into or out of the AutoStick mode can be done at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal When the driver wishes to engage AutoStick simply move the shift lever to the left or right D D position while in DRIVE Hold the shift lever to the right for at least one second to disengage AutoStick The transmission will now oper ate automatically shifting between the five available gears General Information e You can start out in first or second gear The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed e The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop Tapping the shift lever to the D position at a stop will allow starting in second gear After starting the driver should continue to manually upshift D as the vehicle is
172. ee STARTING AND OPERATING 249 CAUTION WARNING Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end Do not use Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF or of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering other types of power steering fluids when servicing fluid temperature and it should be avoided when the power steering system of this vehicle Damage to possible Damage to the power steering pump may the power steering system can result from the use of occur the wrong power steering fluid Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined The power steering system requires the use of MOPAR service interval is not required The fluid should only be Hydraulic System Power Steering Fluid or equivalent checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are which meets Chrysler Material Standard MS 10838 apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho CAUTION rized dealer Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 250 STARTING AND OPERATING possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up WARNING slightly press the center button then lower the lever Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and completely with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to
173. ees 74 Exterior Lights Bulb Type Backup Lamps 4432052604 qd Rc sc S eee ous 3157K Front Park Turn Lamp u usur dom p 8913 3 sias 3757A Front Pog Lamps 4 45244 2572 9206 ikea mni eee ox 9145 Front Side Marker 2 5 04 2439424 an tki s W5W Headlamps Low Beam High Intensity Discharge HID D1S Serviced at Authorized Dealer Headlamps Low Beam 9006 Headlamps High Beam 9005 Rear Turn Stop Tail Lamps vss caca 4269 4 0 9157K NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual BULB REPLACEMENT High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID If Equipped The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of High Intensity Discharge HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop erly See your authorized dealer for service NOTE On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis charge HID headlamps when th
174. elt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoul der belts properly The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate eee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Do not lean against the door If your vehicle has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will BIO ENNESNNCKOTEREEIG CA inflate forcefully into the space between you and the Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument dock panel during front airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Airbags need If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer your arms to reach the steering wheel or instru Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need ment panel Assista
175. em BAS Warning Light If Equipped The malfunction light for the Electronic Stabil ESP ity Program ESP is combined with Brake BAS Assist System BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see an authorized dealer as soon as possible 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M WARNING If a warning light remains on the system may not be working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or BAS Under certain driving conditions where ESP or BAS would be beneficial you if you have not adjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to account for the lack of the feature may be in acci dent 16 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints
176. emory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone lf Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M KICKER HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER SELECTABLE SURROUND DSS IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio amplifier that provides 5 1 channel surround sound from any stereo audio source Anew feature of the KICKER audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound for any audio source or video source Video Surround is optimized for rear seat passengers watching a video and Audio Surround is optimized for front seat passengers for any audio source This surround effect is available for audio from any source AM FM CD Satellite Radio or Video Video AUX and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Refer to Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC DSS modes for audio sources are Stereo and Audio Surround which is surround sound equalized for the front seat occupants The Video
177. emove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equiva lent then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery Leather Seat Care amp Cleaning MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition 340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Glass Surfaces
178. er s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information Flash Lamps with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lamps to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock the Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn si
179. er condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING The Electronic Stability Program ESP cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESP cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ee STARTING AND OPERATING 259 The ESP system has two available operating modes On This is the normal operating mode for ESP Whenever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this On mode This mode should be us
180. erator pedal pressure to main tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine is most effective Racing the engine or spinning the wheels due to the frustration of not freeing the vehicle may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result AUTOSTICK AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission that offers manual gear shifting capability to provide the driver with more control AutoStick allows the driver to in crease engine braking ability control upshift and down shift points and enhance the driving experience This system can also provide the driver with more control during passing city driving mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations 246 STARTING AND OPERATING xe Operation By placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position the shift lever can be moved from side to side This allows the driver to engage the AutoStick mode Moving the shift lever to the right or the left will engage the AutoStick mode In normal driving mode Boxed D displayed in the PRNDL moving the shift lever to the right will enga
181. erece ce bee aes ee a4 222 ee INDEX 389 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 22 paving Feature Protection i es tms 104 lobe oU emerges 4 ces aoe es tee eae 36 72 Body Mechanism Lubrication 323 B Pillar Location 220 ad ieseeoieeres cee S yd 268 Brake Assist SYSICh van c Reo gor UR Ronde dU Re Rs 256 Brake Control System Electronic 29D Brake DUSISR 2 22542 644 0 eA deb req Sed 334 Anti Lock ABS vueasew a 99 Eq wer es 202 295 Plt CHECK sian ea oo rp 334 Master Cylinder ag s endce ados ties copa d sees 334 Ig uci FP C Pn 250 Warne LIS E sasidas sada op ma EC a RR SR 156 Brake Transmission Interlock 241 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 70 Bulb Replacement uou dre i iod dopROR CR EUER RE 349 Bulbs LiNE sers cusa tr Ee GR 2 hee RS E PS ER RS 73 Calibration Compass 3 9 63 ssaa 177 Camera Rear 222a x E 5065 oe wo RT EES 125 Capacities EMU px2 eager ee phd Hae Hens SOROR 355 Caps Filler PUCl gaseennep ew bar CERERE see ones 287 POWer CONE ax Sure saa 44g airs n 249 Radiator Coolant Pressure 331 Car 3 05088 csse ES ped Cac Y au E RE 337 Carbon Monoxide Warning 71 286 CACO BIER OVE ue sube wau pd weg yv sr eee 144 Cargo Area Features sarerea mex She Bored e doe a 143 Curso Compan IE UE 22 cop oa 6 oa oa Inte s 143 Ieri TT 143 monu P tases cue et een Fe oes Oe 143 Carro Load FOO 3 2 83 402 S09 3 7F SUR ved 83
182. ers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Airbag Warning Light Driver Front Airbag Front Passenger Airbag Front and Side Impact Sensors Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolster Front Seat Belt Pretensioners if equipped Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC if equipped ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Advanced Front Airbag Features WARNING The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output e No objects should be placed over or near the appropriate to the severity and type of collision as airbag on the instrument panel because any such determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash which may receive information from the impact sensors severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate at the front of the car Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories t
183. essed Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual override The manual override may be used in the event that the shift lever should fail to move from PARK with the ignition switch in the ON position and the brake pedal pressed To operate the shift lock manual override perform the following steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not start the engine 2 Firmly set the parking brake 242 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee 3 Using a flat blade screwdriver carefully remove the 6 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position e ESIC a a a 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized l l dealer if the shift lock manual override has been used 5 Using the screwdriver reach into the manual override opening Press and hold the shift lock lever down Five Speed Automatic Transmission g The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Interlock Manual Override ee STARTING AND OPERATING 243 WARNING Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the engine if the ignition swit
184. ever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the headlights turn signals headlight beam selection instru ment panel light dimming passing light interior courtesy dome lights and optional fog lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering wheel 031407547 Multifunction Lever Headlights and Parking Lights Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent for parking light operation Turn to the second detent for headlight operation Turn to the third detent for Auto matic Headlight operation if equipped 031407548 Headlight Switch Automatic Headlights If Equipped Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the third detent AUTO to activate the Automatic Headlight system 031407553 Multifunction Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 This system performs two functions With the engine running and the multifunction lever in the AUTO posi tion the headlights will turn on and off based on the surrounding light levels Headlights On Automatically With Wipers If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights it also has this customer programmable feature When your headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is running they will automatically turn on when the wiper system is on Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for fu
185. ew Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM TAPE CD etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the le
186. f operation press the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS B Instrument Panel Features 154 Mi Instrument Cluster 155 W Instrument Cluster Descriptions 156 ll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 166 D Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC PHSDIAVE tac y u qus s eae NUR woe AE eae 168 Arip POnCHONS go dat eho ead ee aoe E 171 D Performance Pages If Equipped 173 H Compass Display x au a Ee x nena vane 177 O Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS If EU Seu caosueqas O Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features O System Status sses lll Media Center 730N 430 RER REN RBZ AM FM Stereo Radio And CD DVD HDD
187. ff press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lamps will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lamps and horn will remain on Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Battery access is through a door located on the rear of the Key Fob Insert a small flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry open the access door ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 021305151 Battery Replacement 1 Battery Access Door 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a batter
188. film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any condition is present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its function Adding Washer Fluid On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC the low washer fluid level will be indicated When the sensor detects a low fluid level the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and the Washer Fluid Low message will be displayed Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325 The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator antifreeze When refilling the washer
189. for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 374 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES See 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or schedule 150 Months Maintenance Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Change the engine oil and engine oil engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary LJ Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the CV joints Drain the transfer case and refill Inspect exhaust system L1 Adjust parking brake on vehicles Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for equipped with four wheel disc brakes damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary d a M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer eee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 375 t This maintenance is re
190. from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire side wall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits
191. ft side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning
192. ge esses bu Ron 41 vol MT ae ee eae eRe ea eee AS eae 83 AJUST 24 s 5 ose O49 O be KATES P E SES 84 CleaniN Sen seen obese ewe eh ee ee I cepa 339 Bas DONY PTT 97 Head Restraints 29 9 tv eoadeee seus 87 Heated gcd ee Koes hee ee ee ee Ree 88 90 Lambar SUP POR dos ont oy os oe So he oe s 85 hin Cr eee babes ee ees s 94 FOWOR uu race Ob eee ee eo eae es 85 86 Rear POMS sce aot wed sete Eyen rann 21 Iren qum C 84 Security Against Thell asss ssis 445 ars dee iai 17 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 159 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 329 Selection of Oil sued sp oe don ERAS Reges 319 Sentry Key Immobilizer 35644 v vy poR da 15 Sentry Key Programming 5 60624 Kine eee ees es 16 Sentry Key Replacement lt 2 s er P9 4 x 16 Service Assistance eee 379 Service Contract 6c xor uris 6444 2 RS doe aks 381 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator liess 158 Service Manuals ee eee 383 Delne The CIOCK 2 44 eeu Pe Saee wee 185 187 190 199 OPNS xl CLSONGL eaaa a e Star ogee ee Ie Shift Lock Manual Override 241 luti M PP 240 Automatic Transmission 240 Shoulder Belts 4c 9 044 eese1 4e2 400e 4 36 DIS TIS TUTO 2 gone Geo a 739 106 157 351 092 SmartBeamSs 4445666424146 455 E ROS nde Bos 102 Sound System KICKED 4 24 oe eee ee Stee eee eee XS Speed Control Cruise Control nA
193. ge the AutoStick mode putting the transmission in the currently engaged gear Moving the shift lever to the Left will engage the AutoStick mode and downshift the transmission one gear For example if the transmission is in Drive mode a boxed D is displayed in the cluster and is operating in third gear tapping the shift lever to the right will engage AutoStick mode while remaining in third gear and a boxed 3 will be displayed in the cluster Tapping the shift lever to the left would also engage AutoStick mode but would force a downshift to second gear and display a boxed 2 in the cluster Once AutoStick mode is engaged a move to the right or left will trigger a upshift or trigger a downshift NOTE In the AutoStick mode the transmission will shift up and down when left or right D D is manu ally selected by the driver The transmission will not allow a downshift if the downshift would result in an engine overspeed condi tion The transmission will always allow a upshift from first to second gear however 2nd 3rd 3rd 4th and 4th 5th upshifts will not be allowed if the vehicle speed is too low to maintain operation in the selected gear The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear After a stop the driver should manually upshift D the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated
194. ght in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents 294 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the front rear axles of the vehicle e The trailer tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Placard in Tire Safety Information for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 WARNING Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom Improper towing can lead to an injury accident mended Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible e Mak
195. gine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331 NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will WARNING decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent engine coolant antifreeze e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on changes the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the cool
196. gle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning e Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately six to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag War
197. gnal lamps will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors WARNING are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poi turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your follows passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flipper glass closed when you are operating the e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information Remote Open Window Feature If Equipped This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door windows at the same time To use this feature press and To Release the Liftgate Flipper Glass release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and Press the FLIPPER GLASS LIFTGATE RELEASE button then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button two times the second press within five seconds of the until the windows lower to the level desired or until they first press to open liftgate flipper glass lower completely 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Using the Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or o
198. gned with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts the power inverter 3 may have to be reset manually To reset the inverter manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON To avoid overloading the circuit check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter Power Inverter 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Press the power inverter switch located on the upper NOTE When the power inverter switch is pressed switch bank to turn the power on to the outlet Press the there will be a delay of approximately one second before switch again to turn the power off the inverter status indicator turns ON The status indica tor of the AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is producing AC power WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Do not use a three prong adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure Power Inverter Switch eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 CUPHOLDERS There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers located in the center console on e Rear Cu
199. h must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving the Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE To avoid unintentional shutdowns the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the message Insert Key Turn To Run will flash in the EVIC until you insert the key Once inserted the message Turn To Run will flash in the EVIC until you turn the key to run DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from inside the vehicle If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door WARNING
200. hat weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg Occupants Combined weight of TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo from Tire Placard EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 865 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 865 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING AVAILABLE MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib ess 160 Ibs 195 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 271 2 2 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and
201. he SAFE range on these engines NOTE Fill engine oil one quart at a time CAUTION e Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Continued CAUTION Continued e Operating the engine with the oil levels below the safe zone or operating with oil levels that exceed the top of the safe zone may cause engine damage Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the 320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 10725 and are approved to MB 229 3 or MB 229 5 will be listed on the back label of the oil container The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic 5W 40 or equivalent engine oil CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE 5W 40 engine oil is preferred for use in all operating temperatures T
202. he vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal ee STARTING AND OPERATING 241 WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to rotating the ignition switch to the LOCK posi tion The key fob can only be removed from the ignition switch when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to either the ON or START position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pr
203. he system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CAUTION The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades The TPMS has been optimized for the original or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range warning have been established for the tire size tX AUHON CAUTION equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads 240 F 116 C or greater pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner t
204. he engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemental additives ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321 Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient serv
205. he five delay positions for the desired Front Wiper Control delay interval The delay can be regulated from a maxi NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed mum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles to a If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h cycle every 1 2 second delay times will be doubled 031507503 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Windshield Washer Operation Mist To use the washer pull the lever toward you and hold Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the occasional usage of the wipers necessary Pull down and delay range the wiper will operate for several wipe release the control lever for a single wiping cycle cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the lever is pulled while in the off position the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Control 031507504 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for th
206. he radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The r
207. he shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave children unat tended inside a vehicle REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Use only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro longed periods with engine running Engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle DRIVE This range should only be selected when the vehicle is at a complete stop and the brakes are firmly applied The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving charac teristics under all normal operating conditions For addi tional shifting information refer to AutoStick in Starting and Operating for further information Rocking the Vehicle If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow sand or mud it can often be moved by a rocking motion Move the shift lever between DRIVE and REVERSE while applying slight pressure to the accelerator ee STARTING AND OPERATING 245 CAUTION When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving between NOTE The Electronic Stability Program ESP and Traction Control if equipped should be turned OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting and Operating for further information The least amount of accel
208. he vehicle is not used for jg put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the towing Failure to do so can result in injury or Navigation Multimedia radio display screen The Park damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch View camera is located on the rear liftgate WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Park View Rear Back Up Camera Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the ParkSense sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob structions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee re ee eae reo a Navigation Multimedia Radio e To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only be used as a parking aid The Park View camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your 2 Select system setup soft key drive path 1 Press the menu hard key 3 Press the camera setup soft key To avoid vehicle damage
209. her Control Rotate the switch upward to the On position to activate the rear wiper M NOTE The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode only Rotate the switch upward to the washer position to activate that rear washer The washer pump will continue to operate as long as the lever or ring is engaged Upon release the wipers will cycle two times before returning to the set position If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the park position if power accessory delay is active Power acces sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door if this happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position and will not go to park UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 If the liftgate flipper glass is open connection to the rear window wiper is interrupted preventing activation of the rear wiper blade When the liftgate flipper glass is closed the rear wiper switch or the ignition switch needs to be turned OFF and ON to restart the rear wiper Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes o
210. here the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Clock Setting Procedure RER REN Radio Uconnect gps RER Only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed
211. hose maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per components as the chemicals can damage your form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Continued Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319 check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of t
212. ht on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold driveability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor SON enhanc nia reformulated gasoline e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor Materials Added to Fuel mance and damage the emissio
213. i Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Continued fications are made Take your vehicle to an autho rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser vice If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way includ ing removal or loosening tightening of seat attach ment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accesso ries may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabili ties contact your authorized dealer 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in a collision While the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system imme
214. iately if the defrost mode is selected or if you manually select a blower speed noise may be heard for 20 seconds This is part of normal operation Most of the time when in Automatic operation you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation mode by pressing the Recirculation button How ever under certain conditions in automatic the system is blowing air out of the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the Recirculation button is pressed the indicator will flash and remain off This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation mode at this time If you would like to go to Recircu lation mode you must first move your mode knob to Panel Panel Floor or Floor then press the Recircu lation button This feature will reduce the possibility of window fogging 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Manual Operation NOTE This system offers a full complement of manual override For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic controls will not function during Remote Start opera Mode Preferred Automatic with Manual Air Temperature tion if the blower control is left in the O Off Control and Manual This means the customer can position override the blower mode and disable the Automatic Temperature Control completely e Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Op eration Chart below for details Automa
215. ice MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information WARNING The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended 322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required CAUTION It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and identified on the battery case Also if a fast charger is used while battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide
216. ight around the child e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt the cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary For the second row center seat belt with the automatic locking retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough allowance to pass it through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is fully extended from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint For additional information refer to Automatic Locking Mode e In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 If the belt still cannot be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the
217. il the hours blink 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the
218. in five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio di
219. ined tray which holds a variety of items Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision Cargo Load Floor 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The cargo load floor is held by spring loaded latches In order to use the cargo load floor use the following procedure NOTE The cargo load floor latches should not be used as cargo tie downs 1 Flip up the pull loop s so they are perpendicular straight up to the top surface of the tray 2 Pull up on the loop s and twist 90 degrees so they are parallel to the slotted hole in the tray 3 Lift the tray over the loop s and reposition the tray 4 Pull up on the loop s and twist 90 degrees so they are perpendicular straight up to the slotted hole in tray 5 Push the loop s back down so they are parallel to the top of the tray REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer The rear wiper washer is controlled by a rotary switch located on the control lever The control lever is located on the right side of the steering column 031507505 Rear Wiper Was
220. inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When t
221. ion of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 270 STARTING AND OPERATINC xe 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle T
222. ion of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety han dling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi cations or capability 278 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read sion components You could lose control and have ings an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Do not rotate the tires as the wider rear tires will not fit capacity other than what was originally equipped On the front
223. ion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range 200 230 F 93 110 C If the pointer remains on the 240 F 116 C or greater and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealership for service 13 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 14 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen JJ ter 15 Electronic Stability Program ESP Warning Light Brake Assist Syst
224. ition 3 Push the multifunction lever away from you toward front of vehicle to engage the high beam mode NOTE This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 20 mph 32 km h To Deactivate 1 Pull back on the multifunction lever to manually deactivate the system normal operation of low beams 2 Push back on the multifunction lever once again to reactivate the system ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 NOTE Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions sticker toll box etc on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The high beam headlights come on at a low intensity level whenever the engine is running and the transmis sion is not in the PARK position The lights will remain on until the ignition switch is turned to LOCK ACC or the parking brake is engaged The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving Automatic Headlight Leveling HID Headlights Only This feature prevents the headlights from interfering with the vision of oncoming drivers Headlight leveling automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in reaction to changes in vehicle pitch Instrument Panel Dimmer Rotate the center potion of the lever to the extreme bottom
225. k and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 6 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require tra
226. key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking NOTE Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with the theft alarm armed will results in the alarm sounding Insert the Key Fob even if the Key Fob battery is dead into the WIN to disarm theft alarm To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 D 020207436 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up Removing Key Fob From Ignition Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the Key Fob to the OFF position and then remove the Key Fob 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE Equipped Personal Settings Customer e If you try to remove the Key Fob before you place the Programmable Features in Understanding Your In shift lever in PARK it may become trapped tempo strument Panel for further information rarily in the ignition switch If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the Key Fob as described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the Key Fob cannot be removed until you obtain service Never leave children a
227. l indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 266 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department
228. l take you to the beginning of the current track Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five seconds Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track If the lt lt SEEK button is pressed during the first two seconds of the track it will jump to the previous track in the list if you press this button at any other time in the track it will jump to the beginning of the track If you press the SEEK gt gt button during play mode it will jump to the next track in the list eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 e While a track is playing press the INFO button to see Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod If the RND icon is the associated metadata artist track title album etc showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps ON to the next screen of data for that track Once you have seen all screens the last INFO button press will take you back to the play mode screen on the radio List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below takes you to List mode List mode enables you to e Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod mage IOICDEADDIS CUMSDUDUSUNE Vale e TUNE control knob The T
229. l turn off the LOW FUEL message and a new DTE value will display e Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset e Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Engine Oil Pressure Shows the current engine oil pressure The scale will read from 0 100 psi 0 689 kPa e Engine Oil Temperature Shows the current engine oil temperature The scale will read from 140 300 F 60 149 C ee p UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 e Display Units of Measure In Performance Pages If Equipped To make your selection press and release the FUNC WARNING TION SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor appears To Reset The Display mance Pages is intended for off highway or off road Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being use only and should not be done on any public displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT roadways It is recommended that these features be button once to clear the resettable function being dis used in a controlled environment and within the played To reset all resettable functions press and hold limits of the law The capabilities of the vehicle
230. ld seats ger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Continued 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Standards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that WARNING Continued you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you e Improper installation can lead to failure of an will use it before you buy it infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or The restraint must be appropriate for your child s killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex weight and height Check the label on the restraint for actly when installing an infant or child restraint weight and height limits A rearward facing infant restraint should only be e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant re restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy not work when you need it ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant e Except for the second row center seating position all passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child plates The second row center position has an auto restraint matic locking retractor Both types of seat belts are l designed to keep the lap portion t
231. ld write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 9V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals 384 These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE C Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance
232. lected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized di
233. levels of the coolant reservoir brake master cylinder and power steering and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a operation fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 362 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M At Each Oil Change Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following h h il filter e Change the engine oil filter pages for the required maintenance intervals e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 eee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 363 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter D Change the engine oil and engine oil If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or
234. ll not unlock the liftgate 8167d4ce Liftgate Release ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle The tailpipes may be hot and you could be seri ously injured if you come into contact with them Liftgate Flipper Glass The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the l liftgate is unlocked To open the flipper glass push up on Liftgate Glass Release the window switch located on the liftgate WARNING 8167d4e0 To avoid injury stand back when opening Glass will automatically rise 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems Once the liftgate flipper glass has been opened connec tion to the rear window wiper is interrupted preventing activation of the rear wiper blade while the flipper glass is open NOTE If a malfunction to the liftgate latch should occur an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap in cover located on the liftgate trim panel WARNING Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poi sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers
235. lles Some airflow is delivered to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained NOTE The defrost mode is not automatically selected It must be manually selected when desired DefrostlFloor We Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets X69 and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles 5ome airflow is delivered to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats Some airflow is delivered to defrost while in floor mode so that comfort can be maintained ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 Bi Level ugh Air flows both through the outlets located in the instrument panel and those located on the floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console and under the front seats to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow The center console outlets deliver conditioned air while the floor outlets deliver heated air Panel 7 Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow Air Conditioning Press this button to turn the air conditioning o
236. lone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the Key Fob in the ignition A child could operate power windows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle other controls or move the vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and M M CAUTON power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes SS Haar after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always tion Opening either front door will cancel this feature remove Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors The time for this feature is programmable Refer to when leaving the vehicle unattended Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlock
237. ly reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Program ESP This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying 258 STARTING AND OPERATING M the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter acting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropri ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or underste
238. lyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO fol low the preceding safety tips CAUTION mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327 NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossl
239. m acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The Anti Lock Brake System is subject to possible detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by improperly installed after market radios or tele phones Continued 254 STARTING AND OPERATING ee NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard This is normal indicating that the Anti Lock Brake System is functioning WARNING To use your brakes and accelerator more safely follow these tips e Do not ride the brakes by resting your foot on the pedal This could overheat the brakes and result in unpredictable braking action longer stopping distances or brake damage When descending mountains or hills repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by down shifting the transmission or locking out overdrive whenever possible Continued WARNING Continued e Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm up which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in loss of vehicle control Be especially careful while driving on slippery roads in close quarter maneuvering parking or stopping Do not drive too fast for road conditions espe cially when roads are wet or slushy A wedge of water can build up between the
240. mance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in an accident This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a accident Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing If you notice fluid loss or transmission slippage or the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also malfunction have your authorized dealer check the damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be transmission fluid level taken to avoi
241. mmended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure 268 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location SSE ET ARES E SRA PSERIOR ERIE RE RS AT ESS RE aD i Boo Saat FO Ro SEER SERS PPS SP SS Se NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed ea uu oe SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 1 on the driver s side B Pillar 2 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 3 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION an 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry Tire Placard Location ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading sect
242. n and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition key to the ACC ON position do not start the engine and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled 4 Turn the ignition key to the OFF position A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not require
243. n and off during manual operation only Condi tioned outside air is then directed through the outlets selected on the mode control dial The button includes an LED that illuminates when manual operation is selected NOTE To manually control the air conditioning the mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position Recirculation This button can be used to block out smoke odors dust high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired The Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The button includes an LED that illuminates which indicates that the Recir culation mode is active You may use this feature separately NOTE Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculate button to return to outside air Some temperature humidity conditions will cause 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M captured interior air to condense on windows and ham per visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation mode to be selected while in the defrost or defrost floor modes Attempting to use Recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the button to blink and then turn off Operating Tips Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning the air conditioning pressing
244. n CEG aes cae sess 82 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 137 DEAS oa soe boe ed Hee a ewe NUR E EC oes 85 86 vcn MD 248 249 DUMTOOL 2 4 sane Gea fa Geek Hoe eee 155 Windows d 44 9 3 99293 30408 d we eye OE RR A 29 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 44 Pretensioners Seat Belts wage oe eee RI bee eo oe Se 43 Programmable Electronic Features 179 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless ENY usse voa d eee eae amp E 19 Radial Piy Tires sce ces e x Re 99d en eee es 279 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 331 Radio Operdhon 5 o3 acd os near oon c Som 225 Radio Satellite Uconnect studios 215 Rain Sensitive Wiper System s 112 Reat Camera oavucrsaeeeeehede casas ER E E 125 Rear Cupholder a cuo qe em dare oreo Se d edis e 143 Regt iCal merci TD 90 Rear Park Sense System suceso s tcaess eee 119 Kear CaL DO 445 exce PR bue dor w 3 es EU P 91 Rear Window Defroster llle 149 Rear Window Features Rear Wiper Washer Reclining Front Seats Recreational Towing Reformulated Gasoline 400 INDEX M IRGeSRiU steam etsy etwas ESTER YS ee ks 323 Remineer LODS OW 2s262 44e5445 pria 104 Reminder Seat Belt 2 242 dewes 6 042 eva 43 Remote Control ial Ne OV tC uices qs acia ced ew as oy d 3A 24 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 542 ma 19 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 223 Remote Starting System eucou se keun s ttes 24 Replacement BUlDS s
245. n be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Press the release button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that serves you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove
246. n each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap First loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicl
247. n the ignition is first turned ON the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside tem perature is greater than 32 F 0 C ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 e Transmission in NEUTRAL Position When the ignition is ON and the transmission is in the NEU TRAL position the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Telescoping Control Handle To unlock the steering column push the control handle downward toward the floor To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as de sired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the control handle upward until fully engaged 81c1ddb8 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could c
248. nce WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work Side airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the seat Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls with your seat belt to restrain you properly In Occupant Restraint Controller ORC some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system Always wear your seat belts even though you have required for this vehicle airbags The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensors signals a central electronic Continued 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags SABIC air bags if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners if equipped as required depending on severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not ex pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and an
249. nd the front fascia from under the vehicle 1 Raise the liftgate 2 Turn the front fog lamp bulb one quarter turn coun 2 Remove the two Torx fasteners terclockwise to remove from housing 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace bulb ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 81572594 073305865 an 3 Squeeze the socket assembly tabs to remove it fromthe 1 Tail Stop Lamp Bulb 3 Back Up Lamp Bulb housing 2 Tail Turn Signal Bulb I 4 Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket 5 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the lamp assembly 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 2 Twist the bulb socket to remove from the CHMSL housing 3 Pull the bulb out of the socket 1 Remove the two screws securing the CHMSL 4 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the CHMSL ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 FLUID CAPACITIES Fuel Approximate 21 Gallons Engine Oil with Filter 6 1 Liter Engine SAE 5W 40 API Certified 6 6 Liters Cooling System es NMMNMNMNMWSIM 6 1 Liter Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 5 14 8 Quarts 14 Liters Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOA
250. ne that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 6 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 MEDIA CENTER 130 RES AM FM STEREO Operating Instructions Radio Mode Aie eS Re ener NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right position to operate the radio side of the radio faceplate Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the jms J xeon Pane Pome Pox nme nl radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second Ca T time to turn off the radio unti Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be 042305232 Set at the same volume level as last played RES Radio 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it
251. ng excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to Mainte nance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 When using the speed control if you experience speed RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until MOTORHOME ETC you can get back to cruising speed Recreational towing is not allowed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to CAUTION maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System Towing this vehicle with any of its wheels on the To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions ground can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper towing is not covered by your new vehicle warranty City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Mi Hazard Warning Flashers 302 O Preparations For Jump Start 305 la If Your Engine Overheats 30
252. ng Vehicle When Stuck esse 244 Hazard Warning Flasher sea messa sebana si 302 Jump Sate uus aX E POE GE SE RENE 3 oe 304 TOW HOOKS 2 eects ae hewn eee Ge Be M 308 Emission Control System Maintenance 315 360 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Break In Recommendations 392 INDEX M Checking Oi Level 2 6 2 9 1 109 31 939 2 33 99 318 COmDOPUBCBL seiss ederrari preii esed de gd 313 Compartment Identification see cc Rr i Coolant Antifreeze les 328 COOL suos 3 odin dts A ae q a 328 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 7 1 286 Dans tO Slat oes eee Gane os eee es RS 299 Hooded tain us ic aod qe ame sane ess oes 239 Fuel Sequere ox vasa iuetps ues qs 202 990 Jm p Staring iua we ae hs ce uter gans ea doe baa 304 OW rrr 915 955 Oil Change Interval 2224542342 Gove en 919 Oil Selection leen 919 355 OVEIIGONND 224 193 45594 ROC ICE CR CS Sede v 302 DIGG P C 238 Temperature Gauge see cedex Rx RUE ER 162 Eneine Oil VISCcOSIDY es esas oddpbERITEREEGSCRES 320 E eme Oil Viscosity Chant dde Est ERIEARR oh 320 Enhanced Accident Response Feature DD Entry System Illuminated 452243 99393 18 E aneia 9 E E E eee ee Rew oes 283 Exhaust Gas Caution 71 286 326 EXN UstOysteh ong qi0 katpin neisi 41 225 Exterior Finish Care au doe RR e X RS 337 Pierot EONS Losses qot 9 Nae 0 dew xr at dened 73 Filters Air C lea er 22 weme s x are dwequeeness 321 POCO O
253. ngine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle 318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these Besides t
254. nic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is changed to REVERSE and the system is disabled the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the message The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when the system is disabled or defective The ParkSense switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled Service ParkSense When ParkSense is defective the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information If SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM ap pears in the EVIC after making sure the rear fascia bumper is clean and free of snow ice mud or other debris see your authorized dealer Cleaning ParkSense Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors System Usage Precautions NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris to keep ParkSense operating properly e Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense e When you turn ParkSense off the instrument cluster will display PA
255. ning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and sever ity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The
256. ns control system All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service Fuel System Cautions assistance e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentra tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of Continued such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance 286 STARTING AND OPERATING iii WARNING Continued against you e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can Carbon Monoxide Warnings kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed a g
257. nsmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The EVIC display will change from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previousl
258. nt Antifreeze Adding Fuel Additives Fuel Adjustable Pedals Air Conditioner Maintenance Air Conditioning Operating Tips Air Conditioning Refrigerant Air Pressure Tires llle 274 Du Ap D rm 45 54 AirBag Deploy Ment ioa 09009 9 oe oe oe werd v s Jo Airbag Light 24 toes och vba eae aai 46 53 58 73 159 Airbag NMaimmenanCe cceacay sn eeoaee ey aes a 57 POA SIde 4 3 he Se Ard Ton AE ODER 51 54 Airbag Window Side Curtain 48 51 54 Alarme ne suos eee a bee Gee oe oS E TS 22 Alarm Security Alarm 22540590845 9x 17 159 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antenna Satellite Radio ls 216 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 329 959 Disposal uoo beSuefPP 545550554 ARES Roos 332 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 202299 Anti Lock Warning LIBht ed oma 159 POMC Syse kates d raa ben Sure E dest AERE A 159 Appearance Gale 264 544 944405440 24804684 336 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 17 Auto Down Power Windows 30 Automatic Dimming Mirror sss eo fees eae he au 80 Automatic Door Locks 20005 28 Automate Headlights xu cas 43 a Hey a iens 101 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 225 Automatic Transmission 242 335 Fluid Level Check 224 2 4a P e 44e39c REO 335 ur Tq sereta Tiei ad pene ganna aaa i 245 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 137 Auxillaty Power Outlet iss 43 4 9E 1957 cuc gc hess eeetet
259. nt training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage while training 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view For optimal training point the battery end of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED Then release both the HomeLink and handheld trans mitter buttons If the EVIC display states DID NOT TRAIN repeat Step 3 If the signal is too weak replace the battery in the handheld transmitter It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button If the channel has been trained the EVIC display will now state CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the EVIC display still states CHANNEL TRAIN ING repeat Step 3 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 NOTE After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLin
260. nterested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 380 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 4
261. o load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and
262. o the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deployment The timing of the second stage determines whether the output force is low medium or high If a low output is sufficient to meet the need the remaining gas in the inflator is expended 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC If Equipped SABIC airbags offer side impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy down ward covering both windows on the impact side 022606177 Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Location ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 NOTE e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners and or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occu pant protection WARNING e If your vehicle is equipped with left
263. o the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower at tachments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only Regard less of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFOR
264. oe Ol serep identi pran os 320 Voice Recognition System VR 83 Warning Flasher Hazard 1259 ax presen her 302 Wane SOIL Over boa 56 4054 xoa coe a oes 4 Warnings and Cautions 008 7 Warranty Information ais vivace ace edo t as 382 Washers Windshield 109 324 Washi VECO ses soe eaeen de ene ees E ne 397 Waxing and POUSHING 225a dbi at RR 397 Wheel and Wheel Trim 2222 x9o ERRREYRE 338 Wheel and Wheel Irim Care aunt RES 338 Witte DUNEN seiat 8 5 d 09 9 dex en ae d 92 157 en INDEX 405 Window Fogging 5 554543 64262 o0eGe ase RP 232 Windshield Wiper Blades isi RR ge 324 lg A TTT 29 Windshield WIDOIS sss 3 9 9 hor 099 Pax hens ee RS 109 go P L 29 Wiper Blade Replacement sss 324 Windshield Defroster Ln 79 290 Wipers Intermittent 2 coude i ymo mn 110 Windshield Washers 1 aoi c abor aga 109 Wipers Rain Sensitive eases ardas 99 RE ses 112 FIG MP P 324 CHRYSLER SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC AR 10WK742 126 AB 2nd Edition Printed in U S A
265. of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS Automatic Temperature Control The Automatic Temperature Control System automati cally maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and passenger 8135020a Automatic Temperature Controls 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se NOTE The numbers on the temperature dial represent a comfort setting when the Mode knob is set to AUTO and not the actual air temperature Turn the mode control on the right knob to AUTO and then turn the blower control on the left knob to either LO AUTO or HI AUTO The LO AUTO position should be used for front seat occupants only The HI AUTO position should be used when more airflow is desired or when rear seat occupants are present Dial in the comfort setting you would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver s or passenger s control knob Once the com fort level is selected the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system Should the de sired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the OFF O position on the blower control knob stops the system completely NOTE The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic con
266. of the vehicle on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Continued TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS Premium System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e 3 Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells STARTING AND OPERATING 279 e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and a graphic displaying tire pressures e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings I X The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will 4 illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display one or more Low Pressure messages Left Front Left Rear Right
267. ogram format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton m
268. on automatically VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect Phone User Manual located on the DVD for further details SEATS Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle They need to be used properly for safe operation of the vehicle WARNING e DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat GS belts In a collision people riding in these areas Lighted Vanity Mirror are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Continued 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Front Manual Seat Adjustment Move the seat forward or rearward using the adjustment bar Lift up on the bar located on the front of the seat near the floor Using body pressure move forward and rear ward on the seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Front Seat Adjustment Recline To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat lean back and release the lever at the desired position To return the seatback lift
269. operly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked NOTE The four way seat does not have an up down adjustment CAUTION WARNING DO NOT place any article under a power seat or Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust path any seat only while the vehicle is parked ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 CAUTION Non _ DO NOT place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event of a rear impact The head restraint should be adjusted so the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear The head restraints have a locking button which Adjustable Head Restraints must be pushed in to lower the head restraint to all positions The restraints may be raised without pushing in the button 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or improperly
270. or each RKE transmitter NOTE Once programmed all RKE transmitters linked to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Easy Entry Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver s seat positioning which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the vehicle There are two possible Easy Entry Exit adjustments available e The seat cushion will move rearward approximately 2 5 in 60 mm if the starting position of the seat is greater than or equal to 2 67 in 68 mm forward of the rear seat stop when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will then move forward approximately 2 5 in 60 mm when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position e The seat will move to the position located 0 3 in 8 mm forward of the rear stop if the starting position is between 0 9 to 2 67 in 23 to 68 mm forward of the rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will move forward to the memory 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie driving position when the key is placed into the TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD ignition and turned out of the LOCK position toward Two latches must be released to open the hood the ACC ON position 1 Pull the release lever inside your vehicle located below
271. our wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E Engine Compartment 6 1L 0 313 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II 314 O Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 314 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance PrO T s 4 on Pear ety acce aote dos Seb ee er 015 W Replacement Parts 23e pes RE vd 917 W Dealer Service sellers 317 Mi Maintenance Procedures 317 ATO EO i52yaceu se ees dh eeea ues 318 O Engine QU Pier occ pues oec doe irtir 321 O Engine Air Cleaner Filter case 4 a4 ha 321 O Maintenance Free Battery viva dar Rs 322 O Air Conditioner Maintenance 322 O Body Lubrication 2 9e S3 RES ee nbawes o Windshield Wiper Blades o Adding Washer Fluid 25 2c dete 324 O Exhaust Systemi 20 2642 442 4a hens hoes 925 HCoolng System 12 39 2x qd ESTA ES 328 312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FUDISKO syste oce RES CE ee hone te we ea 334 D Automatic Transmission 339 D Appearance Care And Protection From COLOSION 4425 bona agen cau se Pure S FUP EON 336 W Fuses eene 341 O Interior Fuses 22 422224 46e 6844444 341 D Underhood Fuses Power Distribution Center 343 D Underhood Fuses Integrated Power Module 346 B Vehicle Storage 22 6 348 W Replacement Bulbs 349 W Bulb Replacement 0 349 3 High Intensit
272. pholders CARGO AREA FEATURES atat Cargo Light The cargo area light is activated by opening the liftgate opening any door or by rotating the dimmer control on the multifunction lever to the extreme top position If all doors are closed and only the liftgate is open pushing on Front Cupholders The rear passengers have access to two cupholders that pull out from the lower center of the rear seat 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M the cargo light lens surface will turn off all interior lights Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped Push on the lens surface a second time to restore the interior lights to normal operation NOTE The purpose of this cover is for privacy not to secure loads It will not prevent cargo from shifting or Rear Storage Compartment protect passengers from loose cargo The rear storage compartment is located on the driver s side behind the second row seat To cover the cargo area 1 Grasp the cover at the center handle Pull it over the cargo area 2 Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in the pillar trim cover 3 The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in place Rear Storage Compartment UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 WARNING In an accident a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor o
273. pletely with clear water e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi e Jf insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug paint and decals and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Special Care Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once paint a month 7 e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing e Tt is important that the drain holes in the lower edges that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint of the doors rocker panels and tailgate must be kept finish clear and open 338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e f you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil ity of the owner e f you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de ice
274. pply the brake of the appro priate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized No driver action is re quired Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Towing in Starting and Operating for further information When TSC is functioning the ESP TCS Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in the Partial Off mode WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway ESP BAS Warning Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The ESP BAS Warning Light and the ESP TCS Indi cator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should both go out with the engine running ESP BAS If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running a mal function has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition switch cycles
275. r controls or move the ve hicle Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death Normal Starting Tip Start NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 239 Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C WARNING Continued To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get able from your authorized dealer is recommended it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the If Engine Fails To Start WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into converter and vehicle If the vehicle h
276. r in the passenger compartment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store it in the vehicle Rear Cargo Cover 035407397 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee a The cargo tie downs located on the cargo area floor should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is_ e To help protect against personal injury passengers moving should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts Cargo tie down hooks are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or colli sion a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve hicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting Cargo Tie Down CagoTieDownHocks in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle 035407398 Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 WARNING Continued Cargo Load Floor e Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits The panel in the load floor is reversible for added utility described on the label attached to the left door or One side is carpeted and the other side features a plastic left door center pillar l
277. r salt etc assure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPARS cleaners or equivalent are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339 e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to r
278. r what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread erooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING All tires should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed see the paragraph on tread wear indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa tion placard for the size designat
279. re will increase gradually until the knob reaches the full clockwise position Automatic Although Auto Lo or Hi can be selected a manually selected airflow level is reccommend for the optimum comfort Manual Manual Manual User selectable outsidc or recirculated Manual automatic control of air temperature is disabled User must adjust temperature knobs to obtain the desired temperature User selectable outside or recirculated Manual automatic control of air temperature is disabled User must adjust temperature knobs to obtain the desired temperature User selectable A C on or off User selectable A C on or off 817dd45b 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee NOTE Regardless of the type of operation when a temperature knob is set to the full clockwise or full counterclockwise position the system will deliver full hot or full cold air out of the ducts respectively The operator can override the AUTO mode setting and select the direction of the air by rotating the right mode knob to one of the following positions When the Mode is set to any position other than AUTO the automatic control of air temperature is disabled The user must adjust the temperature knobs to obtain the desired tem perature Defrost Q7 Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister gri
280. remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully Ay WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers and Excessive Speed Always Buckle Up See wner s Manual For Further Information 80bfe0f0 Rollover Warning Label Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat INTRODUCTION 5 belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year
281. restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint secure try a different seating position Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada s website for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 l
282. return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by t
283. rhead Console O Courtesy Reading Lights O Sunglasses Storage ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 0 Programming LIOBOLIBES sao sue deus H Gate Operator Canadian Programming 122 Eme HomelLink 2 4293 2 913222929255 133 o Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Inno PP ear e ERA oe 133 OO Eee aban oe eee an 133 A TroublesnOotne Tips 2226 mre 139 O General Information 134 Mi Power Sunroof If Equipped 135 O Opening Sunroof Express 136 oO Closing Sunroof Express 136 O Pinch Protect Feature ss s094 6144 nf RS 136 a Pinch Protect Ov rride 4454 8 dee orans ae 136 O Venting Sunroof Express 136 O Sunshade Operation 64440154466 riras 136 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 EL Wand D ffettis ox axes x RS hee oes es 197 B Rear Storage Compartment 144 O Sunroof Maintenance 137 O Retractable Cargo Area Cover G Ignition Off Operation 0 197 eS ee A P O Sunroof Fully Closed 137 D Cargo Tie Down Hooks W Electrical Power Outlets lusus 137 HCargo Load Floor ll Power Inverter If Equipped 140 Bl Rear Window Features 0 Nu UpnGlders usos 9 vare ak de morus anes tues ae 143 H Rear Window Wiper Washer 148 la Cargo Area Features 0 143 O Rear Window Defroster
284. right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types 16 Digit Character Program Type Display No program type or un defined None Adult Hits Adlt Hit 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMEN
285. rought above freezing point before attempting a jump start Positive Battery Post 306 WHAT TO DOIN EMERGENCIES See 0 WARNING si 3 If using a another vehicle to jump start the battery RENI park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by WARNINC moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your Jump Starting Procedure skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK plosion 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 307 CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect th
286. rs the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator character extension and a three n nm e Level 2 31 including a separator character extension and a three Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPE
287. rther information If your vehicle is equipped with a Rain Sensitive Wiper System and it is activated the headlights will automati cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles within approximately one minute and they will turn off 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M approximately four minutes after the wipers completely stop Refer to Windshield Wipers and Washers in this section for further information NOTE When your headlights come on during the daytime the instrument panel lights will automatically dim to the lower nighttime intensity Refer to Lights in this section for further information SmartBeam If Equipped The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle spe cific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view NOTE If the windshield or SmartBeam mirror is replaced the SmartBeam mirror must be re aimed to ensure proper performance See your local authorized dealer To Activate 1 Select Auto High Beams Refer to Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information 2 Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO headlight pos
288. s achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper GCWR must not be exceeded ating for proper tire inflation procedures Total weight must be distributed between the tow mE vehicle and the trailer such that the following four Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres 1 GVWR 2 GTW Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General required when towing a trailer with electronically Information in Starting and Operating for proper actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with inspection procedure a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic 0n ler m When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor brake controller is not required mation in Starting and Operating for proper tire Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s 2 000 Ibs
289. s 157 Miayanatec BONS vs 4254 4 554 9a 33a 44 e ES 18 Instrument Cluster uuu uc 640844 9 ebore d 100 396 INDEX M IBIGHOP 446 sucka 6 6G he oe ose eee pren 107 ie hts On RemunGer so sco acp cet bee ease es 104 bow Biel s e ecGoee4 9394 9s se euctereee es 166 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 158 Map Reading a sume 579v Saba es Sages 108 CL Presse s ous sues Beds ee ee REOR st 160 Posse cuspis Pus x20 233423 42424 106 Rading dama 442542 thee e hd 6545 108 127 Real OVC aee wird e d VERE EE E 352 Rear Tail escis 24 Sy oe Grae tpit 4 3952 Seat Belt Reminder sun 164 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 159 o ja7 r ME MC 349 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 158 Side Marker 45 2 ac ac sobre de bao ew 9 emen 352 SmartBeamis x3 4 9 163 3 3 od rica SOCCER EROR 102 Tire Pressure Monitoring IPMS 160 Traction Control 42124 92299 499 160 260 TOON ues estuve aor sea oo 73 100 106 351 352 en INDEX 397 Yan MITON s an xe eset one soe 48 EE EX 83 i P ee 166 Load PIDOD CAO siera EErEE REAA e goo 147 Loading Vehicle ji qa c 268 LOGS TEE EE E 26 Automatic Door 2 46048 64 nag L3 S rs 3 x23 28 Child Protection 54 en adr hr ERR REOR 28 Ea a see veeo dees deen ewes he ee shes eee 26 Power Door lt 64 64 6 c9 o o esau ees 27 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LAICLD 25244 oa 542935413394 9 4 533 65 66 EURNCAuON DOO V seseg paese ai X eae
290. s UCI 16 pin connector port e The iPod audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display e The iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector if supported by the specific iPod device Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Once in the UCI iPod mode iPod audio tracks if available from iPod start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod automatically starts Play mode In Play mode you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list Turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the lt lt RW button Holding the lt lt RW button long enough wil
291. s after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switches have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down move ment operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To open the window part way press to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop The power window switches remain active for 10 min utes after the ignition has been turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection Driver and Front Passenger Door Only Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop NOTE If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window Any impact due to rough road condi tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during Auto Up If this happens pull the switch lightly to
292. s both visible and audible one second Each side of the warning display has six warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia yellow and two red LEDs The vehicle is close to the and the detected obstacle obstacle when the red LED is ON IE The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles The following chart shows the warning display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle ParkSense Display ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER 1st LED 59 in 150 cm Yes Half Second 2nd LED 51 in 130 cm 3rd LED 45 in 115 m 4th LED 31 5 in 80 cm 39 in 100 cm 5th LED 25 5 in 65 cm 33 5 in 85 cm 6th LED 20 in 50 i 28 in 70 cm 7th LED 16 40 cm 20 in 50 cm 8th LED 12 in 30 cm NOTE The Rear Park Assist em will MUTE the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone Enable Disable ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with a switch located on the upper switch bank of the instrument panel Press the switch once to turn ParkSense on push the switch a second time to turn Park Sense off 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When the switch is pressed to disable the system the instrument cluster will display the PARK ASSIST DIS ABLED message Refer to Electro
293. s saaria aas E eee 299 Isid a eae ee eE aa a es a 292 Mirumum Requirements asked x S844 s 295 Trailer and Tongue Weight 293 Tailer Towing Gude 2240s v care neg ee sands 299 Maier Wels issao qe Pages XR PE dE Edo ER 299 JIGDSDHSSION 453 9525 56 ou oh eu RE mE Re RES 335 Atomatic auos 6a amp he we Ee eS 242 335 Be C SCSC CSCSCsCits vnu a ee a ee ee a ee 2 ee 240 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry xmas eode dues epp amp ace 22 Transmitter Garage Door Opener LIomeLl mk a2 ewewm mhsi944 5 444954 545 128 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 243 xem Ruhm errem d rd 19 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 19 Tread Wear Indicators llis 276 Tomana senserat rekake de hans 106 157 351 352 UCI Connel gine bon eke enee sks ene oe 210 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 83 Underhood Fuses 0004 343 346 Uniform Tire Quality Grades aramas 385 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 210 Universal Transmitter llis 128 Unleaded Gasoline 0 00 ee eee 282 Bisous CIE pm 099 Vanity MUEEOES 24 2 2e bx septi neide dee pop tes 83 Variance COMPASS 25444 645445854 Rene he ds 178 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 Veluclo Loadiig reeter CoS cea terpa RS 269 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vee OMe sp ya vd Ha eo ux euee SPESE tees 233 348 ViscOsty B
294. scs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE BEjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed
295. se harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED WARNING The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or pem Power Sunroof Switch any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Opening Sunroof
296. sed on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 361 e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when vehicle off road for an extended period of time the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever required comes first Once a Month Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle as required Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation At Each Stop for Fuel e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Check the fluid
297. sing the provided interface cable UCI supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the UCI features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e f the radio has a USB port connecting an iPod to this port does not play the media For playing an iPod use the separate 16 pin connector port in the glove compartment on some vehicles ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 e Connecting an iPod to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the UCI feature to control the connected device Connecting The iPod Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s 16 pin connector port which is located in the glove compartment on some vehicles Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s UCI system iPod may take a few seconds to connect the iPod starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE e You may have to remove the connector pin protection cap from the 16 pin connector port prior to connect ing the cable e f the iPod battery is completely discharged it may not communicate with the UCI system until a mini mum charge is attained Leaving the iPod connected to the UCI system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle
298. sion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install only the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mile age and increased emissions 334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Brake System WARNING Fluid Level Check Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced or immediately if the brake system warning light is on If necessary add fluid to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced If the brake fluid level is abnormally low check system for leaks Continued e Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its perfor
299. splay If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Continued ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 CAUTION Continued e Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e RES is asingle CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded e Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE BEjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to
300. splay until the FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed e Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the current run and display the vehicle s best 1 8 mile 1 4 mile run e To clear the vehicle s best 1 8 mile 1 4 mile run press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for five seconds Instantaneous G Force When selected this screen displays the current G Force longitudinal and lateral along with a friction circle that displays the directions of the forces Peak G Force When selected this screen displays all four G force values two longitudinal and two lateral e When a force greater than zero is measured the display will update the value as it climbs As the G Force falls the peak forces will continue to display e Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the peak force values Compass Display The compass readings indicate the direction A the vehicle is facing Press and release the COMPASS TEMPERATURE button to dis COMPASS play one of eight compass readings and the Button outside temperature NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving Automatic Compass Calibration When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the
301. starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323 WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil or Refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by
302. t If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks there will be one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the vehicle The rear hook will be located on the driver s side of the vehicle NOTE For off road recovery it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle CAUTION Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 309 CAUTION e Towing this vehicle using any other method could result in extensive damage to the transfer case WARNING Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps and chains may break causing serious injury and or transmission e Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Limited Warranty The manufacturer requires towing your vehicle with all f
303. t cluster 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION WARNING e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable e Drivers must be careful when backing up even to recognize every obstacle including small ob stacles Parking curbs might be temporarily de tected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense to be able to stop in time when the obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense when using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sys tem Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedes trians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 WARNING Continued iei REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF e Before using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear System it is strongly recommended that the ball Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected image of the rear of your vehicle whenever the shift lever from the vehicle when t
304. t may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 3 Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn
305. te Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule I Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 368 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES See 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or Schedule 78 Months Maintenance Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the T Change the engine oil and engine oil engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 369 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Service Schedule L1 Change the engine
306. ter filling Fuel Filler Cap 288 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and will cause the MIL to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full e Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that cap is properly tight ened e If the gas cap is not tighten properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Center Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information Tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened Refer to Onboard Diagnostic Sys tem in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information ee
307. the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this 16 second arming period opening any door or the liftgate will cancel the arming If the Vehicle Security Alarm success fully arms the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set To Disarm the System To disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm you will need to press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or turn the ignition key to the ON position If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed after 16 seconds when you pull the door handle to exit the alarm will sound If this occurs press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm You may also accidentally disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm by unlocking the driver s door with the key and then locking it The door will be locked but the Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm ILLUMINATED ENTRY The interior lights come on when you open any door or use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to un lock any door They will remain on for approximately 30 seconds after all doors are clos
308. the lever lean forward and release the lever WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seat belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment Eight Way Driver s Power Seat The manual lumbar support adjustment lever is located The driver s power seat switches are located on the on the right side of the driver s seatback all models and outboard side of the driver s seat The bottom switch on the left side of the passenger s seatback if equipped controls up down forward rearward and tilt adjust Moving the lumbar control lever forward and rearward ment The top switch controls the seatback recline adjust will increase or decrease the lumbar support ment b TODA EX Manual Lumbar Control Power Seat Switches 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Four Way Passenger s Power Seat If Equipped The front passenger s power seat switches are located on Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is the outboard side of the passenger s seat The bottom dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could switch controls forward rearward adjustment The top cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be switch controls the seatback recline adjustment pr
309. the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat heating element and or degrade the material of the seat NOTE Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seatback to fold down easily 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1 Pull the release strap toward the front of the vehicle to release 030906037 Rear Seat Folded To Raise Rear Seat Rear Seat Release Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place If interfer NOTE Do not fold the rear seat down with the center ence from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully seat belt buckled locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its IE 2 Fold the rear seat completely forward psp possunt ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Storage Rear Seat Armrest If Equipped The rear seat may be equipped with a center storage The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion
310. tic Temperature Control Operation UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 The System will Mode Air Temperature Air Recirculation A C Operation How Blower Control Control Control Control Operation Full Automatic Set blower knob to either Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Operation Hi or Lo Auto Set temperature be overridden knobs for Comfort Blower Preferred User selectable Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Automatic Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Hi or Lo Auto Set temperature knobs for Comfort to any speed be overridden Mode Preferred and Manual Air Temperature Control Full Manual Operation Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point Adjust Temperature knobs to select the desired temperature Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Hi or Lo Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Adjust Temperature knobs to select the desired temperature Manual Air Temperature Control Operation When the Mode knob is set to any position other than Auto the Temperature knob operates in the non automatic comfort condition The numbers on the Temperature dial are no longer valid in this mode This mode allows the user to select any desired air temperature When the temperature knob is in full conterclockwise position the air temperature will be Cooler As the knob is rotated clockwise the temperatu
311. tire tread and the road This hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction braking ability and control After going through deep water or a car wash brakes may become wet resulting in decreased performance and unpredictable braking action Dry the brakes by gentle intermittent pedal action while driving at very slow speeds ee STARTING AND OPERATING 255 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake Sys tem ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM and Electronic Stability Program ESP All five of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions Also your vehicle is equipped with Trailer Sway Control TSC Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the ve hicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ABS cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns
312. to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M MEDIA CENTER 130 RES RSC AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate TUNE SCROLL 042305233 RES RSC Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played ee UN
313. tomer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 382 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler
314. trol operation How ever if the driver and or passenger temperature knobs are set to the full hot or full cold positions the air temperature out of the ducts will be full hot or full cold respectively With the temperature setting in these posi tions the system does not attempt automatic comfort control re The air conditioning in this system is au tomatic Pressing this button while in Air AUTO mode will cause the LED to flash Conditioning three times and remain off This indicates that the system is in AUTO and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 The system will automatically control re circulation However pressing this but e Under certain conditions after the vehicle is turned off the climate control system may recalibrate and a CE Recirculation ton will temporarily put the system in Recirculation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present This will cause the LED to illuminate NOTE The surface of the climate control panel and the top center of the instrument panel should be kept free of debris due to the climate control sensor s location Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operation of this system To provide you with maximum comfort in the auto matic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain off until the engine warms up However the fan will engage immed
315. tures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occu pants or others eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 6 Airbag Warning Light This light turns on and remains on for six to 9 eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition PN switch is first turned ON If the light is not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 7 Anti Lock Brake ABS Warning Light 3 This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS Warning Light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light is not on If the ABS Warning Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the ABS Warning Light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspect
316. u can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads HOT H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on HOT H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat 304 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Run Flat Tires This vehicle is equipped with run flat tires Although the tires are designed with a run flat feature that allows the vehicle to be driven approximately 50 miles 80 km at 55 mph 88 km h immediate servic
317. u from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is 6 To release the belt push the red button marked PRESS comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its will withdraw any slack in the belt stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down 5 i ts up the webbing to allow it to retract fully WARNINCG A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts MORD DON Er aya Rama RTT Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Removing Slack from Belt eee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seating positions the shoulder belt ca
318. utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ REL RET radios only with uconnect For sales code RER RBZ REN REP REW RB2 or REZ touch screen radio UCI feature refer to the separate RER REN RBZ RB2 or REZ User s Manual UCI is available only if equipped as an option with these radios This feature allows you to plug an iPod into the vehicle s sound system through a 16 pin connector u
319. vehicle doors liftgate liftgate flipper glass and ignition for unautho rized operation When the alarm is activated the Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audio and visual signals The horn will sound the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three minutes If the disturbance is still present driver s door passenger door other doors ignition after three minutes the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash for an addi tional 15 minutes NOTE The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ ent Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Set the Alarm The alarm will set when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to lock the doors and liftgate or when you use the power door lock switch while the door is open After all the doors are locked and closed the 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Vehicle Security Light located in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that
320. wee sarn 106 O Headlignt Time Delay serres up sordos 107 AEO E 24 45 asnenu eta RS S dede s 107 B Front Map Reading Lights 108 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 109 o Windshield Wiper Operation 109 O Intermittent Wiper System sasssa caas 110 3 Windshield Washer Operation IH ENSE 46448 RERO PGRSCR LAM eee EE NP NES 111 O Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 112 W Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 113 ll Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 114 ll Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 116 MITOA oh e ot ou SEQ x SURE ER een iep 116 o To Set a Desired Speed ETO WeaChVale been us a aedaeteneeeanes El TO Resume Speed eras x des cha gs heed as 117 o To Vary The Speed Setting acere ex 117 o To Accelerate For Passing 2 2 Resa 118 Wi Parksense Rear Park Assist If Equipped 119 O Parksense GenSOrS s osa eae arrimo errer 119 O Parksense Warning Display 120 O Enable Disable Parksense 22293 drm as 121 O Service L arksense pao eee ae tebe dem eg 122 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee E Cleaning Parksense uc succ EeRPRS RYE 3 O System Usage Precautions sese xa ll Parkview Rear Back Up Camera If EODD ce cna pec d 9 d x sera Enna op d D Turning Parkview On Or Off With Navigation Multimedia Radio O Turning Parkview On Or Off Without Navigation Multimedia Radio E Ove
321. y symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered Power outlets labeled with a key are powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position while the outlets labeled with a battery are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e All accessories connected to the battery powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced O Front Power Outlets The front power outlets are located to the left and right of the convenience tray lower center of instrument panel Pull lightly on the tab of the plastic cover to access these power outlets The rear power outlet if equipped is located in the left rear cargo area The power outlet located on the left side of the tray can be used to power a conventional cigar lighter UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 WARNING Continued e Do not touch with wet hands e Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION e Many accessories that can be
322. y Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Continued All seating positions in your vehicle have combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a colli sion the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 WARNING Continued 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people go around your lap riding in these areas are more likely to be seri a ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat Latch Plate 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING plate into the buckle until you hear a click
323. y clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 Reposition the access door panel over the battery opening and snap into place General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 328 ft 100 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start How to Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK
324. y Discharge Headlamps HID If PQUIPPEG 446446484 po508 955 4 Seded d 349 o Halogen Headlamps If Equipped 350 O Front Tuy Signal dudas oven osu a ced as 351 E Front Fog Lamp 229 9 ane yen eo ae Soares 352 O Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup Lamps a8 Geese lege succes aeseeea eee wt 352 D Center High Mounted Stop Lamp iS alise PCT been Cee aeaeenee 354 IM Plaid Capacities cesse dade ER br coin 355 Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 356 SEN IU eare re 2 ERREUR eo wes eee RR 356 siqui o CC 357 es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 6 1L 9 071606045 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 Engine Oil Dipstick 2 Power Distribution Center 8 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 Engine Oil Fill 4 Integrated Power Module 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Battery 11 Air Cleaner Filter 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD Il Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indi
325. y malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs the vehicle should be stopped the engine shut off and the vehicle allowed to cool Thereafter service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications should be ob tained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions 328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where
326. y trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for 20 seconds until the EVIC display states CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED Note that all channels will be erased Indi vidual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE i e Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to complete the training for rolling code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you are having any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cau
327. ys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the
328. yte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia REN RER or RBZ user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio To Manually Set the Clock 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 4 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 5 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee

Cadillac 2009 SRX Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents